Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Reference Manual
Part 1: Basic Functions
Main Index
Corporate Europe Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Corporation MSC.Software GmbH MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
2 MacArthur Place Am Moosfeld 13 Shinjuku First West 8F
Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA 81829 Munich, Germany 23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
Telephone: (800) 345-2078 Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0 1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Fax: (714) 784-4056 Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6 Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with
the terms of such license.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not
intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no
liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information
contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright ©2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited.
The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from
MSC.Software suppliers. Contains IBM XL Fortran for AIX V8.1, Runtime Modules, (c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1990-2002,
All Rights Reserved.
MSC, MSC/, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Fatigue, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Laminate Modeler are trademarks or registered
trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is
a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software
Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a
registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA.
EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Macrovision
Corporation. HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS
and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of UGS Corp. a Siemens
Group Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners.
P3:2008R1:Z:BASC:Z:DC-REF-PDF
Main Index
`çåíÉåíë
m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä=
==
N= fåíêçÇìÅíáçå=íç=m~íê~å
fåíêçÇìÅáåÖ=m~íê~å= =O
båÖáåÉÉêáåÖ=jçÇÉäáåÖ=cìåÅíáçå~äáíáÉë= O
aáêÉÅí=dÉçãÉíêó=^ÅÅÉëë= O
^å~äóëáë=jçÇìäÉë= O
^å~äóëáë=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= O
oÉëìäí=sáëì~äáò~íáçå=~åÇ=oÉéçêíáåÖ= O
m^qo^k=`çãã~åÇ=i~åÖì~ÖÉ=Em`iF= O
jp`Kjîáëáçå= O
låäáåÉ=eÉäéLaçÅìãÉåí~íáçå= O
m~íê~å=cê~ãÉïçêâ= =P
eçï=m~íê~å=fãéçêíë=a~í~= P
j~å~ÖáåÖ=i~êÖÉ=jçÇÉäë=áå=m~íê~å= P
dêçìéë= P
sáÉïéçêíë= Q
eçï=m~íê~å=bñéçêíë=jçÇÉäë= Q
m~íê~å=`çãã~åÇ=i~åÖì~ÖÉ= Q
rëÉê=`ìëíçãáò~íáçå= Q
rëáåÖ=m~íê~å=Ñçê=båÖáåÉÉêáåÖ=^å~äóëáë= =S
dÉçãÉíêó= S
cáåáíÉ=bäÉãÉåí=jçÇÉäáåÖ= S
cìåÅíáçå~ä=^ëëáÖåãÉåíë= S
^å~äóëáë= S
mçëíéêçÅÉëëáåÖ= S
eqji=_~ëÉÇ=låäáåÉ=eÉäé= =T
`çåíÉñíJpÉåëáíáîÉ=eÉäé= T
O= m~íê~å=tçêâëé~ÅÉ
jçÇÉäáåÖ=táåÇçï= =NM
m~íê~å=j~áå=cçêã= NM
dê~éÜáÅë=sáÉïéçêí= NN
Main Index
2 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
qÜÉ=jÉåì=_~ê= =NO
jÉåì=_~ê=hÉóïçêÇë NO
cáäÉ= NO
dêçìé= NO
sáÉïéçêí= NO
sáÉïáåÖ= NO
aáëéä~ó= NO
mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= NO
qççäë= NP
eÉäé= NP
qÜÉ=qççä=_~ê= =NQ
póëíÉã=qççä=m~äÉííÉ NQ
aìêáåÖ=~=éäçíW= NR
aìêáåÖ=ãÉëÜáåÖW= NR
aìêáåÖ=ÖÉçãÉíêó=ÅçåëíêìÅíáçåW= NR
aìêáåÖ=ëÉëëáçå=ÑáäÉ=éä~óÄ~ÅâW= NR
jçìëÉ=cìåÅíáçå=qççä=m~äÉííÉ NS
sáÉïáåÖ=qççä=m~äÉííÉ NT
aáëéä~ó=qççä=m~äÉííÉ NU
jçÇÉä=lêáÉåí~íáçå=qççä=m~äÉííÉ NV
i~ÄÉäáåÖ=~åÇ=páòáåÖ=qççä=m~äÉííÉë OM
qÜÉ=^ééäáÅ~íáçåë=_~ê= =ON
^ééäáÅ~íáçå=_ìííçåë ON
eáëíçêó=táåÇçï=~åÇ=`çãã~åÇ=iáåÉ= =OO
`çãã~åÇ=iáåÉ=`çããÉåíë= OO
P= båíÉêáåÖ=~åÇ=oÉíêáÉîáåÖ=a~í~
cçêãëI=táÇÖÉíëI=~åÇ=_ìííçåë= =OQ
`çããçåäó=rëÉÇ=táÇÖÉíë OS
^ééäó=_ìííçå= OS
^ìíç=bñÉÅìíÉ= OS
`~åÅÉä=_ìííçå= OS
`ççêÇáå~íÉ=cê~ãÉ= OT
a~í~Äçñ= OT
aÉÑ~ìäí=s~äìÉë= OT
cáäíÉê= OU
lh=_ìííçå= OU
lìíéìí=fa=iáëí= OU
oÉëÉí=_ìííçå= OV
pÅêçää=_~ê= OV
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 3
pïáíÅÜ=_ìííçå= OV
qçÖÖäÉ=_ìííçå= OV
péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉíë PM
q~Äìä~ê=a~í~=fåéìí=péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉíë= PM
qç=ÉåíÉê=çê=ãçÇáÑó=Ç~í~W= PM
jìäíáéäÉ=a~í~=fåéìí=péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉíë= PN
qç=ÅêÉ~íÉ=åÉï=ÉåíêáÉëW= PO
qç=ãçÇáÑó=çê=ÇÉäÉíÉ=ÉåíêáÉëW= PO
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=båíáíáÉë= =PP
pÅêÉÉå=máÅâáåÖ PP
máÅâáåÖ=páåÖäÉ=båíáíáÉë= PP
máÅâáåÖ=jìäíáéäÉ=båíáíáÉë= PP
oÉÅí~åÖäÉ=máÅâáåÖ=EÇÉÑ~ìäíF= PQ
mçäóÖçå=máÅâáåÖ= PQ
`óÅäÉ=máÅâáåÖ= PQ
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=åçåJÉñáëíÉåí=ÖÉçãÉíêó= PR
pÉäÉÅí=jÉåì PR
`çããçå=pÉäÉÅí=fÅçåë= PS
sáëáÄäÉ=båíáíó=máÅâáåÖ== PS
mçäóÖçå=máÅâ=fÅçå== PS
máÅâáåÖ=fÅçåë= PT
^åóÒ=fÅçå== PT
dç=íçÒ=fÅçåë= PT
= PU
= PU
båíáíó=cáäíÉê=fÅçåë= PU
^ñáë=~åÇ=sÉÅíçê=pÉäÉÅí=fÅçåë= PU
mêáåÅáé~ä=^ñáë=fÅçåë= PU
dÉçãÉíêó=pÉäÉÅí=fÅçåë PV
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=mçáåíë= PV
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=`ìêîÉë= QM
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=pçäáÇë= QM
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=pìêÑ~ÅÉë= QM
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=sÉêíáÅÉë=Ñçê=aÉÅçãéçëÉÇ=pìêÑ~ÅÉë= QN
cbj=pÉäÉÅí=fÅçåë QN
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=kçÇÉë= QN
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=bäÉãÉåíë= QN
qÜÉ=iáëí=mêçÅÉëëçê= =QP
Main Index
4 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
Q= tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=cáäÉë
cáäÉ=qóéÉë=~åÇ=cçêã~íë= =QS
m~íê~å=a~í~Ä~ëÉ= QS
pÉëëáçå=cáäÉ= QS
gçìêå~ä=cáäÉ= QS
e~êÇÅçéó=cáäÉ= QS
m~íê~å=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ= QS
fdbp=cáäÉ= QS
m~íê~å=OKR=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë= QS
pí~êíìé=cáäÉë QT
qÜÉ=ëÉííáåÖëKéÅä=ÑáäÉ= QT
mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=båîáêçåãÉåí=s~êá~ÄäÉë=Ñçê=e~êÇÅçéó= RQ
líÜÉê=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=båîáêçåãÉåí=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RQ
qÜÉ=éPéêçäçÖKéÅä=~åÇ=éPÉéáäçÖKéÅä=cáäÉë= RQ
pí~êíìé=pÉëëáçå=cáäÉë= RQ
pí~êíìé=ìëáåÖ=ëóëíÉã=ÑáäÉë= RR
oÉÅçêÇáåÖ=ëÉëëáçå=ÑáäÉ=áåáíá~äáò~íáçå= RR
mä~óáåÖ=ëÉëëáçå=ÑáäÉ=áåáíá~äáò~íáçå= RR
pí~êíìé=Ñêçã=Åçãã~åÇ=äáåÉ= RR
qÜÉ=qÉãéä~íÉ=a~í~Ä~ëÉ=cáäÉ=EãÇ|íÉãéä~íÉKÇÄF= RS
qÜÉ=cáäÉ=jÉåì= =RT
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= RT
cáäÉ=`çãã~åÇë= =SO
iççâ=få= SO
cáäÉ=k~ãÉ= SO
k~ãáåÖ=`çåîÉåíáçåë= SO
cáäÉë=çÑ=qóéÉ= SO
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=~=qÉãéä~íÉ= SQ
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= SR
`çããçå=fíÉãë=áå=fãéçêí=aá~äçÖ=_çñÉë= TP
fãéçêíáåÖ=~å=m~íê~å=a~í~Ä~ëÉ= TQ
m~íê~å=a_=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= TR
péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉí=eÉ~ÇáåÖë= TS
kìãÄÉêÉÇ=båíáíó=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑ~ìäíë= TS
aÉÑ~ìäí=lÑÑëÉí= TS
fåÅêÉãÉåí= TS
pìÄãçÇÉä= TS
k~ãÉÇ=båíáíó=mêÉÑáñ=aÉÑ~ìäíë= TS
aÉÑ~ìäí=mêÉÑáñ= TS
mêÉÑáñ= TT
pìÄãçÇÉä= TT
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 5
aìéäáÅ~íÉ=båíáíó=jÉêÖÉ=léíáçåë= TT
péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉí=`Éääë= TU
fãéçêí=`çäìãå= TV
fãéçêí=cáäíÉê=léíáçåë= TV
jáåáãìã=fa=~åÇ=j~ñáãìã=fa=`çäìãåë= UM
fa=lÑÑëÉí=`çäìãå= UN
lÑÑëÉí=léíáçåë= UO
k~ãÉ=mêÉÑáñ=`çäìãå= UP
bèìáî~äÉåÅÉ=léíáçåë= UQ
fa=kìãÄÉêë= UQ
iç~Çë=~åÇ=_çìåÇ~êó=`çåÇáíáçåë= UQ
aáëÅêÉíÉ=cbj=cáÉäÇë= UQ
^å~äóëáë=`ççêÇáå~íÉ=cê~ãÉ=jÉêÖÉ=oìäÉ= UR
bèìáî~äÉåÅÉ=léíáçåë=aá~äçÖ=_çñ= US
m~íê~å=a~í~Ä~ëÉ=mêÉîáÉï= UT
fãéçêíáåÖ=m^qo^k=OKR=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉë= UU
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= VM
båíáíó=i~ÄÉä=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= VN
léíáçåë=Ñçê=båíáíó=pÉäÉÅíáçå= VN
léíáçåë=Ñçê=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= VN
^ëëáÖåáåÖ=lÑÑëÉíë= VN
fãéçêíáåÖ=ja=k~ëíê~å=fåéìí=cáäÉë= VO
ja=k~ëíê~å=fåéìí=cáäÉ=léíáçåë= VP
ja=k~ëíê~å=båíáíó=i~ÄÉä=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= VQ
léíáçåë=Ñçê=båíáíó=pÉäÉÅíáçå= VR
léíáçåë=Ñçê=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= VR
^ëëáÖåáåÖ=lÑÑëÉíë= VR
fãéçêíáåÖ=bñéêÉëë=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉë= VS
bñéêÉëë=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= VT
bñéêÉëë=fãéçêí=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= VV
mêÉîáÉï=bñéêÉëë=cáäÉ= NMM
bñéêÉëë=kÉìíê~ä=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå= NMN
fãéçêíáåÖ=fdbp=cáäÉë= NMP
fdbp=båíáíáÉë=pìééçêíÉÇ=Ñçê=fãéçêí= NMP
fdbp=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= NMR
fdbp=båíáíó=`çäçê=cáäíÉê= NMT
fdbp=båíáíó=iÉîÉä=cáäíÉê= NMU
fdbp=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå= NMV
pÜçï=fdbp=dêçìéë= NNM
aÉäÉíÉ=fdbp=dêçìéë= NNM
bñéçêíáåÖ=fdbp=pìêÑ~ÅÉ=a~í~=íç=~=m~íê~å=O=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ= NNN
`êÉ~íÉ=dêçìéë=Ñêçã=i~óÉêë= NNN
fãéçêíáåÖ=`^qf^=cáäÉë= NNN
fãéçêíáåÖ=~=`^qf^=jçÇÉä= NNO
Main Index
6 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=`^qf^=sQ=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NNP
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=`^qf^=sR=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NNT
bñ~ãéäÉ=pÅÉå~êáç=NW= NOM
bñ~ãéäÉ=pÅÉå~êáç=OW= NON
fãéçêíáåÖ=íÜÉ=`^qf^=sR=qêÉÉ= NOQ
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=`^qf^=sQ= NOT
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=`^qumobp= NOU
dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå=Ñçê=`^qf^=sQ=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NPM
dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå=Ñçê=`^qf^=sR=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NPN
dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå=Ñçê=`^qf^=sQLsRL`^qumobp=cáäÉë= NPO
fãéçêí=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= NPP
fãéçêíáåÖ=mêçLbkdfkbbo=cáäÉë= NPQ
fãéçêíáåÖ=~=mêçLbkdfkbbo=jçÇÉä= NPQ
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=mêçLbkdfkbbo=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NPR
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=mêçLbkdfkbbo= NPT
m~íê~å=mêçbkdfkbbo=fåíÉêãÉÇá~íÉ=KÖÉç=cáäÉ=EmêáãáíáîÉ=dÉçãÉíêóF= NQO
mêçLbkdfkbbo=cáäÉ=qóéÉë=~åÇ=jçÇÉä=^ÅÅÉëë=léíáçåë= NQP
bñÉÅìíáåÖ=m~íê~å=mêçbkdfkbbo=cêçã=mêçLbkdfkbbo=EéP|éêçÉF= NQP
fãéçêíáåÖ=aáêÉÅí=jÉëÜ=jÉëÜÉë=Ñêçã=~=mêçLbkdfkbbo=jçÇÉä= NQQ
aáêÉÅí=jÉëÜ=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= NQR
fãéçêíáåÖ=råáÖê~éÜáÅë=cáäÉë= NQR
råáÖê~éÜáÅë=fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=aáêÉÅí=m~ê~ëçäáÇ= NQT
^ííêáÄìíÉ=fãéçêí= NQV
mêÉîáÉï=^ííêáÄìíÉë= NQV
mêÉîáÉï=`çãéçåÉåíë= NQV
råáÖê~éÜáÅë=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå= NRM
råáÖê~éÜáÅë=fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=bñéêÉëë=qê~åëä~íáçå= NRO
råáÖê~éÜáÅë=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå=Ñçê=bñéêÉëë=qê~åëä~íáçå= NRQ
fãéçêíáåÖ=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=EñãíF=cáäÉë= NRR
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=m~ê~ëçäáÇ= NRS
m~ê~ëçäáÇ=jçÇÉä=råáíë= NRU
fãéçêíáåÖ=^`fp=Eë~íF=cáäÉë= NRU
`çåîÉêíáåÖ=^`fp=båíáíáÉë=íç=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=båíáíáÉë= NSM
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=^`fp= NSN
^`fp=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå= NSQ
fãéçêíáåÖ=pqbm=cáäÉë= NSR
_ÉåÉÑáíë= NSR
^ÅÅÉëëáåÖ=pqbm=iáÄê~êáÉë= NSS
açïåäç~ÇáåÖ=~åÇ=fåëí~ääáåÖ= NSS
iáÅÉåëáåÖ= NSS
pqbm=båíáíáÉë=pìééçêíÉÇ=Ñçê=fãéçêí= NST
pìééçêíÉÇ=^mOMP=fãéçêí=båíáíáÉë= NSU
pìééçêíÉÇ=^mOMV=fãéçêí=båíáíáÉë= NTO
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=pqbm=^mOMP=çê=^mONQ=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=cçêã~í= NTR
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 7
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=pqbm=^mOMPLONQ= NTT
fãéçêí=léíáçåë=Ñçê=pqbm=^mOMV= NTV
pqbm=^mOMV=fãéçêí=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= NUN
pqbm=^mOMPL^mOMV=dêçìé=`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå= NUO
fãéçêíáåÖ=pqi=cáäÉë= NUP
pqi=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= NUQ
båíáíó=i~ÄÉä=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= NUR
léíáçåë=Ñçê=båíáíó=pÉäÉÅíáçå= NUR
léíáçåë=Ñçê=lÑÑëÉí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= NUR
^ëëáÖåáåÖ=lÑÑëÉíë= NUR
fãéçêíáåÖ=sa^=cáäÉë= NUS
sa^=fãéçêí=léíáçåë= NUT
jçÇÉä=råáíë= NUU
fãéçêíáåÖ=oÉëìäíë= NVM
qÉãéä~íÉ=Ñçê=m^qo^k=OKR=fãéçêí=oÉëìäíë= NVN
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=~=m^qo^k=OKR=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ= NVO
kÉìíê~ä=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= NVP
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=qáíäÉ= NVQ
bñéçêíáåÖ=fdbp=pìêÑ~ÅÉ=a~í~=~ë=m~ê~ãÉíêáÅ=_á`ìÄáÅ=pìêÑ~ÅÉë= NVQ
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=^`fp=cáäÉë= NVR
^`fp=ë~îÉ=ÑáäÉ=Ep^qF= NVR
^`fp=sÉêëáçå= NVR
pÅ~äáåÖ=c~Åíçê= NVR
pìééçêíÉÇ=^`fp=bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= NVS
^`fp=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= NVS
bñéçêíáåÖ=~=m~ê~ëçäáÇ=qê~åëãáí=cáäÉ= NVT
m~ê~ëçäáÇ=ñãí=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= NVU
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=`^qf^=sQ=cáäÉë= NVV
`^qf^=sQ=KãçÇÉä=ÑáäÉ=ÅêÉ~íáçå= NVV
`^qf^=sÉêëáçå= NVV
pìééçêíÉÇ=`^qf^=sQ==bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= NVV
`^qf^=sQ=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= OMM
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=fdbp=cáäÉë= OMN
dÉçãÉíêáÅ=båíáíó=qóéÉë=~åÇ=íÜÉáê=pìééçêíÉÇ=fdbp=bèìáî~äÉåíë= OMN
fdbp=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= OMQ
fdbp=cáäÉ=pí~êí=pÉÅíáçå= OMR
fdbp=cáäÉ=däçÄ~ä=pÉÅíáçå=m~ê~ãÉíÉêë= OMS
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=pqbm=cáäÉë= OMT
pìééçêíÉÇ=^mOMP=bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= OMT
pìééçêíÉÇ=^mOMV=bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= OMT
pìééçêíÉÇ=^mONQ=bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= ONM
pqbm=^mONQ=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= ONM
bñéçêíáåÖ=íç=sa^=cáäÉë= ONN
sa^=sÉêëáçå= ONN
Main Index
8 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
pìééçêíÉÇ=sa^=bñéçêí=båíáíáÉë= ONN
sa^=bñéçêí=léíáçåë= ONO
bÑÑÉÅí=çÑ=råÇçÒ=áå=pÉëëáçå=cáäÉë= ONQ
oÉÅçêÇáåÖ=~=pÉëëáçå=cáäÉ= ONQ
mêáåíáåÖ=çå=táåÇçïë= ONS
mçëíëÅêáéí=cáäÉë= ONT
båÅ~éëìä~íÉÇ=mçëíëÅêáéí=EbmpF=cáäÉë= ONU
mêáåíáåÖ=çå=rkfu= OOM
m~ÖÉ=pÉíìé= OON
mçëíëÅêáéí=léíáçåë= OON
eçï=íç=rëÉ=bmp=cáäÉë= OOQ
m~íê~åe~êÇ=cáäÉ=léíáçåë= OOR
`dj=léíáçåë= OOS
emJdi=léíáçåë= OOV
emJdiLO=léíáçåë= OPO
mêáåíÉê=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå=cáäÉ= OPQ
_jm=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQM
gmbd=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQM
jmbd=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQN
mkd=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQP
qfcc=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQQ
soji=fã~ÖÉë=lìíéìí= OQQ
qç=ÖÉåÉê~íÉ=~=oÉéçêí=cáäÉW= OQT
oÉéçêí=cçêã~í=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë= OQU
oÉéçêí=cáäÉ=lìíéìí= OQV
R= ^ää=^Äçìí=dêçìéë
dêçìé=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =ORO
dêçìé=k~ãÉë ORO
dêçìé=jÉãÄÉêëÜáé ORP
dêçìé=pí~íìë ORP
`ìêêÉåí=dêçìé= ORP
mçëíÉÇ=dêçìé= ORP
q~êÖÉí=dêçìé= ORP
dêçìé=^ííêáÄìíÉë ORP
`êÉ~íáåÖ=~åÇ=j~å~ÖáåÖ=dêçìéë ORQ
`êÉ~íáåÖ=dêçìéë= ORQ
^ÇÇáåÖ=dêçìé=jÉãÄÉêë= ORQ
oÉãçîáåÖ=dêçìé=jÉãÄÉêë= ORQ
qê~åëÑçêãáåÖ=dêçìéë= ORQ
aÉäÉíáåÖ=dêçìéë= ORQ
dêçìé=qê~åëÑçêã~íáçåë ORQ
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 9
qê~åëä~íáçå= ORR
oçí~íáçå= ORR
pÅ~äáåÖ= ORS
jáêêçêáåÖ= ORS
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=lêáÉåí~íáçå= ORT
máîçíáåÖ= ORU
oÉéçëáíáçåáåÖ= ORV
qê~åëÑçêãáåÖ=iç~ÇëI=_çìåÇ~êó=`çåÇáíáçåëI=~åÇ=mêçéÉêíáÉë= OSM
iç~Çë=~åÇ=_çìåÇ~êó=`çåÇáíáçåë= OSM
mêçéÉêíáÉë= OSM
pÉí=k~ãÉë= OSN
qÜÉ=dêçìé=jÉåì= =OSO
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë OSO
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=^Åíáçåë= OSR
^ÇÇáåÖ=lêéÜ~å=båíáíáÉë=íç=dêçìéë= OTM
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=q~êÖÉí=dêçìé= OTN
oÉå~ãáåÖ=~=dêçìé= OTO
pÉäÉÅí=båíáíáÉë= OTQ
oçí~íáåÖ=dêçìéë= OUM
pÅ~äáåÖ=dêçìéë= OUO
jáêêçêáåÖ=dêçìéë= OUQ
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=dêçìé=lêáÉåí~íáçå= OUR
máîçíáåÖ=dêçìéë= OUT
oÉéçëáíáçåáåÖ=dêçìéë= OUU
eáÉê~êÅÜáÅ~ä=dêçìéë=EeÖêçìéëF= =OVO
eáÉê~êÅÜáÅ~ä=dêçìéë= OVO
`êÉ~íáåÖ=~å=eÖêçìé OVR
^ÇÇáåÖ=eáÉê~êÅÜáÅ~ä=dêçìéë= OVS
`êÉ~íáåÖ=íÜÉ=ÖÉçã=eÖêçìé= OVT
^ÇÇáåÖ=pìÄ=eÖêçìéë=íç=~å=eÖêçìé= OVT
`êÉ~íáåÖ=íÜÉ=ëìÄ=eÖêçìéë= OVV
mçëíáåÖ=~å=eÖêçìé PMN
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=dêçìé=eáÉê~êÅÜáÉë PMN
aÉäÉíáåÖ=eÖêçìéë PMP
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=`ìêêÉåí=eÖêçìé PMQ
bñéçêíáåÖ=~åÇ=fãéçêíáåÖ=eÖêçìé=qêÉÉë PMQ
fãéçêíáåÖ=~åÇ=rëáåÖ=`^qf^=cáäÉë=ïáíÜ=dêçìé=eáÉê~êÅÜó=píêìÅíìêÉë= PMR
S= sáÉïéçêíë
sáÉïéçêí=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =PMU
Main Index
10 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
sáÉïéçêí=k~ãÉë PMV
sáÉïéçêí=pí~íìë PMV
`ìêêÉåí=sáÉïéçêí= PMV
mçëíÉÇ=sáÉïéçêí= PMV
q~êÖÉí=sáÉïéçêí= PMV
sáÉïéçêí=aáëéä~ó=^ííêáÄìíÉë PMV
sáÉïéçêíë=~åÇ=dêçìéë PNM
k~ãÉÇ=sáÉïë=áå=sáÉïéçêíë PNM
`çããçå=sáÉïéçêí=cÉ~íìêÉë PNM
qáäáåÖ=sáÉïéçêíë PNN
qÜÉ=sáÉïéçêí=jÉåì= =PNO
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= PNO
sáÉïéçêí=`çãã~åÇë= =PNP
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=q~êÖÉí=sáÉïéçêí= PON
mçëíáåÖ=~åÇ=råéçëíáåÖ=dêçìéë=áå=~=sáÉïéçêí= POP
aÉÑáåáåÖ=íÜÉ=`ìêêÉåí=dêçìé=áå=~=sáÉïéçêí= POQ
^ééäóáåÖ=~=k~ãÉÇ=sáÉï=íç=~=sáÉïéçêí= POR
oÉå~ãáåÖ=~=sáÉïéçêí= POS
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=bÑÑÉÅíë= POT
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=péÉÅíêìã=o~åÖÉ=aÉëáÖå~íáçå= POV
T= sáÉïáåÖ=~=jçÇÉä
sáÉï=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =PPQ
`ìêêÉåí=sáÉï PPQ
k~ãÉÇ=sáÉïë PPQ
jçÇÉä=pé~ÅÉ PPQ
pÅêÉÉå=pé~ÅÉ PPQ
sáÉïáåÖ=`ççêÇáå~íÉ=póëíÉã=m~ê~ãÉíÉêë PPR
sáÉïáåÖ=mä~åÉ= PPR
táåÇçï=`ÉåíÉê= PPR
jçÇÉä=`ÉåíÉê= PPR
^ìíçã~íáÅ=`ÉåíÉêáåÖ= PPR
cáííáåÖ=~=sáÉï PPS
sáÉï=qê~åëÑçêã~íáçåë PPS
sáÉï=`äáééáåÖ= PPS
mÉêëéÉÅíáîÉ=sáÉïë PPT
sáÉï=m~ê~ãÉíÉêë PPT
cçÅ~ä=mçáåí= PPT
táåÇçï=`ÉåíÉê= PPT
sáÉïáåÖ=mä~åÉ=aáëí~åÅÉ= PPT
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 11
lÄëÉêîÉê=mçëáíáçå=aáëí~åÅÉ= PPT
cêçåí=~åÇ=_~Åâ=`äáééáåÖ=mä~åÉ=aáëí~åÅÉë= PPT
qÜÉ=sáÉïáåÖ=jÉåì= =PPU
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= PPU
sáÉïáåÖ=`çãã~åÇë= =PQM
qê~åëÑçêã~íáçå=léíáçåë= PQN
cáí=sáÉï PQO
pÉäÉÅí=`ÉåíÉê PQO
pÉäÉÅí=`çêåÉêë PQO
oçí~íáçå=qÉêãáåçäçÖó= PQS
äáëíOH= PQT
j~å~ÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=m~ê~ãÉíÉêë=çÑ=mÉêëéÉÅíáîÉ=sáÉïáåÖ PRS
U= aáëéä~ó=`çåíêçä
aáëéä~ó=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =PSO
däçÄ~ä=~åÇ=içÅ~ä=aáëéä~ó=cÉ~íìêÉë PSO
aáëéä~ó=jçÇÉë PSO
oÉåÇÉêáåÖ=píóäÉë PSO
táêÉÑê~ãÉ= PSP
táêÉÑê~ãÉL^ÅÅìê~íÉ= PSP
eáÇÇÉå=iáåÉ= PSP
eáÇÇÉå=iáåÉL^ÅÅìê~íÉ= PSQ
pÜ~ÇÉÇLcä~í= PSQ
`ÜçêÇ~ä=qçäÉê~åÅÉ= PSQ
pÜ~ÇÉÇLpãççíÜ= PSR
cáåáíÉ=bäÉãÉåí=aáëéä~ó PSR
bê~ëáåÖ=~åÇ=mäçííáåÖ=båíáíáÉë PSS
pÜêáåâáåÖ=båíáíáÉë PSS
qáíäÉë PSS
`ççêÇáå~íÉ=cê~ãÉë PST
k~ãÉÇ=^ííêáÄìíÉë PST
péÉÅíêìãë PST
o~åÖÉë PST
`çäçê=m~äÉííÉ PSU
iáÖÜí=pçìêÅÉë PSU
qÜÉ=aáëéä~ó=jÉåì= =PSV
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= PSV
aáëéä~ó=`çãã~åÇë= =PTM
aáëéä~óáåÖ=bäÉãÉåí=`çååÉÅíáîáíó=çÑ=`çååÉÅíçêë= PUQ
Main Index
12 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
sÉÅíçê=^ííêáÄìíÉë= PUU
i~ÄÉä=píóäÉ= PVM
_É~ã=aáëéä~ó= PVN
V= mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë
mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =QOS
^å~äóëáë=`çÇÉë QOS
^å~äóëáë=qóéÉë= QOS
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=^å~äóëáë=`çÇÉë= QOS
mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~ééáåÖ= QOT
jçÇÉä=qçäÉê~åÅÉ QOT
t~êåáåÖ=jÉëë~ÖÉë QOT
e~êÇï~êÉ=oÉåÇÉêáåÖ QOU
oÉéêÉëÉåíáåÖ=dÉçãÉíêó QOU
jçÇÉä=råáíë QOU
qÜÉ=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë=jÉåì= =QOV
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= QOV
mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë=`çãã~åÇë= =QPN
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=^å~äóëáë=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ= QPP
j~ééáåÖ=cìåÅíáçåë QPQ
mêçéÉêíó=pÉí=péêÉ~ÇëÜÉÉíë= QPQ
j~íÉêá~ä=mêçéÉêíó=j~ééáåÖ=q~ÄäÉë= QPS
bäÉãÉåí=mêçéÉêíó=j~ééáåÖ=q~ÄäÉë= QPU
fåîçâáåÖ=íÜÉ=m`i=cìåÅíáçå=Ñçê=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=pïáíÅÜáåÖ= QQP
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=dÉåÉê~ä=cìåÅíáçå= QQQ
NM= qççäë
qççäë=`çåÅÉéíë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= =QTM
iáëíë QTM
båíáíó=qóéÉë= QTM
`ä~ëëáÑáÅ~íáçå=jÉíÜçÇë= QTM
^ííêáÄìíÉ= QTM
^ëëçÅá~íáçå= QTM
dêçìé=^ëëáÖåãÉåí= QTN
_ççäÉ~å=léÉê~íáçåë= QTN
rëáåÖ=iáëíë= QTN
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë QTN
lìíéìí=léíáçåë= QTO
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 13
oÉéçêí=cáäÉë= QTP
råáíë= QTP
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=çÑ=cáåáíÉ=bäÉãÉåí=jçÇÉäë= QTP
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=~åÇ=bäÉãÉåíë= QTP
tÉáÖÜí=c~Åíçêë= QTQ
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=~åÇ=cáÉäÇë= QTQ
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=~åÇ=j~íÉêá~äë= QTQ
^å~äóëáë=jçÇÉä=qóéÉë=~åÇ=j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë= QTQ
qÜêÉÉJÇáãÉåëáçå~ä=jçÇÉäë= QTQ
qïçJÇáãÉåëáçå~ä=mä~åÉ=píêÉëë=~åÇ=mä~åÉ=píê~áå=jçÇÉäë= QTQ
qïçJÇáãÉåëáçå~ä=^ñáëóããÉíêáÅ=jçÇÉäë= QTR
_É~ã=iáÄê~êó QTR
pí~åÇ~êÇ=pÜ~éÉë= QTR
^êÄáíê~êó=pÜ~éÉë= QTS
rëáåÖ=~=pìêÑ~ÅÉ= QTS
oÉ~ÇáåÖ=~=cáäÉ= QTS
píêÉëë=oÉÅçîÉêó=mçáåíë= QTS
k~ãÉÇ=^ééäáÅ~íáçå=oÉÖáçåë QTS
aÉëáÖå=píìÇáÉë=~åÇ=aÉëáÖå=léíáãáò~íáçå QTT
aÉëáÖå=píìÇáÉë= QTT
s~êá~ÄäÉë= QTT
oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉë QTU
oÉÄ~ê=aÉÑáåáíáçåë QTU
jp`Kc~íáÖìÉ QTU
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë QTU
jp`Ki~ãáå~íÉ=jçÇÉäÉê QTU
^å~äóëáë=j~å~ÖÉê QTU
qÜÉ=qççäë=jÉåì= =QTV
jÉåì=`çåîÉåíáçåë= QTV
qççäë=`çãã~åÇë= =QUN
`êÉ~íáåÖ=iáëíë= QUN
iáëíë=Äó=^ííêáÄìíÉë= QUN
dÉçãÉíêáÅ=båíáíáÉë= QUO
^ííêáÄìíÉë=çÑ=cbj=båíáíáÉë= QUP
`ççêÇáå~íÉ=s~äìÉL`ççêÇáå~íÉ=cê~ãÉë= QUQ
o~åÖÉ=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=~åÇ=qçäÉê~åÅÉë= QUQ
péÉÅáÑóáåÖ=íÜÉ=o~åÖÉ= QUQ
qçäÉê~åÅÉ= QUR
mêçéÉêíáÉë= QUR
iáëíë=Äó=^ëëçÅá~íáçå= QUS
q~êÖÉí=iáëí= QUT
aÉÑáåáåÖ=íÜÉ=oÉÖáçå=Ñçê=j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=`~äÅìä~íáçå= QVP
Main Index
14 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
aáëéä~óáåÖ=j~ëë=mêçéÉêíó=oÉëìäíë= QVQ
pìãã~êó=aáëéä~ó=jÉíÜçÇ= QVR
dêçìé=aáëéä~ó=jÉíÜçÇ= QVR
båíáíó=aáëéä~ó=jÉíÜçÇ= QVS
oÉéçêíáåÖ=j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=oÉëìäíë= QVU
^ÅíáîÉ=oÉéçêí=cáäÉë= QVV
oÉéçêí=cáäÉ=`çããÉåíë= RMM
`ÉåíÉê=çÑ=dê~îáíó= RMM
mêáåÅáé~ä=fåÉêíá~=nì~åíáíáÉë= RMM
fåÉêíá~=qÉåëçê=áå=`ççêÇáå~íÉ=cê~ãÉ= RMM
fåÉêíá~=qÉåëçê=~í=`d= RMM
mêáåÅáé~ä=aáêÉÅíáçå=sÉÅíçêë= RMM
oçí~íáçå=^åÖäÉë= RMN
oÉàÉÅíÉÇ=båíáíó=iáëí= RMN
rëáåÖ=`~äÅìä~íÉÇ=_É~ã=mêçéÉêíáÉë= RMO
`êÉ~íáåÖ=pí~åÇ~êÇ=_É~ã=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë= RMP
`êçëë=pÉÅíáçå=aáëéä~ó= RMQ
s~êá~ÄäÉ=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë= RMR
`êÉ~íáåÖ=^êÄáíê~êó=_É~ã=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë=rëáåÖ=_çìåÇ~êó=iççéë= RMS
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=fåéìí=mçáåíë=çéíáçåW= RMU
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=pÉäÉÅí=pìêÑ~ÅÉ=léíáçåW= RMU
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=oÉ~Ç=cáäÉ=léíáçå= RNM
píêÉëë=oÉÅçîÉêó=mçáåíë= RNM
`êÉ~íáåÖ=^êÄáíê~êó=_É~ã=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë=rëáåÖ=`ÉåíÉêäáåÉë= RNN
`ÉåíÉêäáåÉ=jÉíÜçÇ=bñ~ãéäÉëK= RNP
oÉéçêíáåÖ=_É~ã=pÉÅíáçå=a~í~= RNS
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=_É~ã=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë= RNU
aÉäÉíáåÖ=_É~ã=`êçëë=pÉÅíáçåë= RNV
`êÉ~íáåÖ=k~ãÉÇ=^ééäáÅ~íáçå=oÉÖáçåë= RON
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=båíáíÉë=Ñçê=k~ãÉÇ=oÉÖáçåë= ROO
pÉäÉÅíáåÖ=dêçìéë=Ñçê=k~ãÉÇ=oÉÖáçåë= ROP
jçÇáÑó=~=k~ãÉÇ=^ééäáÅ~íáçå=oÉÖáçåë= ROP
pÜçï=k~ãÉÇ=^ééäáÅ~íáçå=oÉÖáçåë= ROQ
aÉäÉíáåÖ=k~ãÉÇ=^ééäáÅ~íáçå=oÉÖáçåë= ROQ
`êÉ~íáåÖ=jçÇÉä=s~êá~ÄäÉë= ROR
s~äìÉë=~ë=s~êá~ÄäÉë= ROS
bäÉãÉåí=mêçéÉêíáÉë=~ë=s~êá~ÄäÉë= ROU
_É~ã=aáãÉåëáçåë=~ë=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPM
j~íÉêá~ä=mêçéÉêíáÉë=~ë=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPO
aáëéä~óáåÖ=jçÇÉä=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPP
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=jçÇÉä=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPR
aÉäÉíáåÖ=jçÇÉä=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPR
`êÉ~íáåÖ=aÉëáÖå=píìÇáÉë= RPU
aÉëáÖå=s~êá~ÄäÉë= RPV
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 15
aÉëáÖå=`óÅäÉ=pÉäÉÅí= RQO
aÉëáÖå=oÉëéçåëÉë= RQO
aÉëáÖå=lÄàÉÅíáîÉë= RQP
aÉëáÖå=`çåëíê~áåíë= RQQ
aáëéä~ÅÉãÉåíë=L=báÖÉåîÉÅíçêëI=sÉäçÅáíóI=^ÅÅÉäÉê~íáçåI=pm`=cçêÅÉ= RQQ
píêÉëëI=píê~áåI=píê~áå=båÉêÖó=C=cçêÅÉ= RQQ
dêáÇ=mçáåí=cçêÅÉ= RQQ
`çãéçëáíÉ=píêÉëëI=píê~áåI=~åÇ=c~áäìêÉ= RQR
cêÉèìÉåÅó=C=_ìÅâäáåÖ=jçÇÉ= RQR
däçÄ~ä=`çåëíê~áåíë= RQR
`çåëíê~áåí=pÉíë= RQR
j~ñáãìãLjáåáãìã=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= RQR
^ééäóáåÖ=oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉë= RQT
`êÉ~íáåÖ=~åÇ=j~å~ÖáåÖ=oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉë= RQU
bñéçêíáåÖ=~åÇ=fãéçêíáåÖ=oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉë= RRQ
iç~ÇáåÖ=oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉë=áå=~=m~íê~å=a~í~Ä~ëÉ= RRR
bÇáíáåÖ=~=mäçí=pÉí=rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=mäçí=pÉí=péêÉ~Ç=pÜÉÉí= RSN
aáëéä~óáåÖ=íÜÉ=`çåíÉåíë=çÑ=íÜÉ=mäçí=pÉí=péêÉ~Ç=pÜÉÉí= RTM
aáëÅìëëáçå=çÑ=~=cÉï=péÉÅáÑáÅ=mäçí=pÉí=`~é~ÄáäáíáÉë= RTR
`êÉ~íáåÖ=oÉÄ~ê=aÉÑáåáíáçåë= RTV
dÉçãíêáÅ=Ä~ëÉÇ= RUN
sÉÅíçê=Ä~ëÉÇ= RUN
bäÉãÉåí=Ä~ëÉÇ= RUN
`êÉ~íáçå=çÑ=~=mêçéÉêíó= RUT
jçÇáÑáÅ~íáçå=çÑ=~=mêçéÉêíó= RUU
bñ~ãéäÉ=`êÉ~íáçå=çÑ=~=Oa=ëÜÉää= RUU
bñ~ãéäÉ=jçÇáÑáÅ~íáçå=çÑ=~=mêçéÉêíó= RUV
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=íÜÉ=bäÉãÉåí=éêçéÉêíáÉë=çÑ=çåÉ=ÉäÉãÉåí= RUV
mêçéÉêíáÉë=fãéçêí=`çÇÉ=bñ~ãéäÉë= RUV
bñ~ãéäÉ=N= RVM
bñ~ãéäÉ=O= RVM
bñ~ãéäÉ=P= RVM
bñ~ãéäÉ=Q= RVM
fãéçêí=o~ï=a~í~= RVO
pÉäÉÅí=qÉëí=a~í~= RVO
`~äÅìä~íÉ=mêçéÉêíáÉë= RVP
NN= o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå= =RVS
mìêéçëÉ RVS
cÉ~íìêÉë=çÑ=jp`=o~åÇçã RVS
^Çî~åí~ÖÉ=çîÉê=ríáäáíó=îÉêëáçå=çÑ=jp`=o~åÇçã RVT
Main Index
16 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
^êÅÜáíÉÅíìêÉ=çÑ=jp`=o~åÇçã RVT
iáãáí~íáçåë RVU
_~ëáÅ=o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=qÜÉçêó= =RVV
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå RVV
qÜÉçêó SMM
`êçëëJmçïÉê=péÉÅíê~ä=aÉåëáíó=~åÇ=`êçëëJ`çêêÉä~íáçå=cìåÅíáçåë SMO
`ìãìä~íáîÉ=oççí=jÉ~å=pèì~êÉ=E`ojpF SMQ
`çÜÉêÉåÅÉ=cìåÅíáçå=çê=pÅÜï~êòDë=fåÉèì~äáíó SMQ
kìãÉêáÅ~ä=fåíÉÖê~íáçå=rëáåÖ=içÖJiçÖ=^ééêçñáã~íáçå SMQ
sçå=jáëÉë=píêÉëë=áå=o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë SMR
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=mêçÅÉëë= =SMS
mêçÅÉëë=lîÉêîáÉï SMS
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=`óÅäÉ SMS
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé SMU
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=`óÅäÉ SMU
rëáåÖ=jp`=o~åÇçã= =SNM
lìíéìí=cáäÉëW SNM
bñ~ãéäÉ=mêçÄäÉãëW= SNO
bñ~ãéäÉ=NW==`óäáåÇÉê=ëìÄàÉÅíÉÇ=íç=Ä~ëÉ=mpac=áåéìíK= =SNP
mêçÄäÉã=aÉÑáåáíáçåW= SNP
oÉèìáêÉÇ=píÉéë=íç=mÉêÑçêã=o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë SNQ
cbj=jçÇÉä SNR
`êÉ~íÉ=kÉï=a~í~Ä~ëÉ= SNR
`êÉ~íÉ=`óäáåÇêáÅ~ä=`ççêÇáå~íÉ=póëíÉã= SNS
`êÉ~íÉ=`ìêîÉ= SNT
`êÉ~íÉ=pìêÑ~ÅÉ= SNV
`êÉ~íÉ=jÉëÜ=pÉÉÇ= SOM
oÉéÉ~í=jÉëÜ=pÉÉÇ=~äçåÖ=äÉåÖíÜ=çÑ=`óäáåÇÉê= SON
`êÉ~íÉ=jÉëÜ= SOO
mÉêÑçêã=kçÇÉ=bèìáî~äÉåÅÉ= SOP
`êÉ~íÉ=j~íÉêá~ä= SOQ
`êÉ~íÉ=mÜóëáÅ~ä=mêçéÉêíáÉë= SOR
`êÉ~íÉ=_çìåÇ~êó=`çåÇáíáçåë= SOS
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë SOT
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé SOU
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé=EÅçåíF= SOV
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé=EÅçåíF= SPN
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé=EÅçåíF= SPP
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé=EÅçåíF= SPQ
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí SPR
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí= SPS
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 17
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SPT
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SPU
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SPV
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SQM
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SQN
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SQO
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SQQ
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇFK= SQR
pçãÉ=çíÜÉê=ÑÉ~íìêÉë=~î~áä~ÄäÉ=çå=uvmäçí=cçêã= SQT
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SQU
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SRM
oÉä~íáîÉ=aáëéä~ÅÉãÉåí= SRM
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=uv=mäçí=EÅçåíÇF= SRO
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=ojp=píêÉëë=cêáåÖÉ=mäçí SRQ
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=J=ojp=píêÉëë=cêáåÖÉ=mäçí=E`çåíÇKF= SRR
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=J=ojp=^ÅÅÉäÉê~íáçå=cêáåÖÉ=mäçí=ìëáåÖ=ojp=ëÅ~äÉ=Ñ~Åíçê=çÑ=
PKM= SRS
bñ~ãéäÉ=OW==q~ÄäÉ=J=pìÄàÉÅíÉÇ=íç=páãìäí~åÉçìë=o~åÇçã=bñÅáí~íáçå=áå=
qÜêÉÉ=aáêÉÅíáçåë= =SRU
o~åÇçã=fåéìí=mêçÑáäÉ SSM
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé= SSM
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë= SSP
sÉêáÑó=o~åÇçã=fåéìí=ìëáåÖ=jp`=o~åÇçã=uv=mäçí= SSR
`êçëë=péÉÅíê~ä=aÉåëáíó=mäçíë= SST
`êçëë=péÉÅíê~ä=aÉåëáíó=mäçí= SSU
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë=Ó=ojp=^å~äóëáë= SSV
oÉéÉ~í=mêçÅÉÇìêÉ=Ñçê=ojp=~ÅÅÉäÉê~íáçå= STN
bñ~ãéäÉ=PW==mä~íÉ=J=pìÄàÉÅíÉÇ=íç=mêÉëëìêÉ=~åÇ=mçáåí=iç~Ç=ïáíÜ=`êçëë=
péÉÅíêìã=fåéìí= =STP
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉíìé STR
o~åÇçã=^å~äóëáë= STS
`êÉ~íÉ=mpa=fåéìí=mêçÑáäÉ= STU
`êçëë=mpa=fåéìí= STV
`çåíáåìÉ=éêçÅÉëëáåÖ=mpac=uv=mäçí= SUN
`êÉ~íÉ=uv=mäçí=Ñçê=`êçëëJ`çêêÉä~íáçå=cìåÅíáçå_ÄÉíïÉÉå=kçÇÉ=NM=~åÇ=RQ=áå=
w=aáêÉÅíáçå= SUP
`êÉ~íÉ=ojp=cêáåÖÉ=mäçí=çÑ=^ÅÅÉäÉê~íáçå=áå=w=aáêÉÅíáçå= SUR
cçääçïáåÖ=páãáä~ê=mêçÅÉÇìêÉI=`êÉ~íÉ=cêáåÖÉ=mäçíë=Ñçê=ojp=sçåJjáëÉë=
píêÉëëÉë= SUS
oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë SUT
^ééÉåÇáñ=^= =SUU
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=rëáåÖ=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉ= SUU
Main Index
18 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉí=ré=J=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇKF=
SUV
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉí=ré=J=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇKF=
SVN
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉí=ré=J=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇKF=
SVN
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉí=ré=J=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇKF=
SVQ
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=^å~äóëáë=pÉí=ré=J=jp`=o~åÇçã=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇKF=
SVR
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=rëáåÖ=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉ= =SVS
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF SVT
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMN
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMO
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMQ
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMQ
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉ=E`çåíÇF= TMR
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMT
cêÉèìÉåÅó=oÉëéçåëÉ=pÉíìé=J=m~íê~å=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉE`çåíÇF= TMT
m~êíá~ä=fåéìí=iáëí=çÑ==ÑêÉèJéä~íÉKÄÇÑÒ= TMV
^= cáäÉ=cçêã~íë
qÜÉ=kÉìíê~ä=póëíÉã=`çåÅÉéí= =TNO
qÜÉ=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ= =TNP
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=^ééäáÅ~íáçåë TNP
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=cçêã~í TNR
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=qóéÉë= TNR
kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉë=pìééçêíÉÇ=áå=m~íê~å= TNR
cáåáíÉ=bäÉãÉåí=jçÇÉä=m~ÅâÉíë= TNR
dÉçãÉíêó=jçÇÉä=m~ÅâÉíë= TNS
dcbdL`cbd=q~ÄäÉ=m~ÅâÉíë= TNS
qêáããÉÇ=pìêÑ~ÅÉ=pçäáÇ=jçÇÉä=m~ÅâÉíë= TNT
m^qo^k=OKR=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=m~ÅâÉí=eÉ~ÇÉê= TNT
m^qo^k=OKR=kÉìíê~ä=cáäÉ=`çåíÉåíë=~åÇ=cçêã~í= TNT
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ=ORW=qáíäÉ=`~êÇ= TNT
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ=OSW=pìãã~êó=a~í~= TNU
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ MNW=kçÇÉ=a~í~= TNU
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ MOW=bäÉãÉåí=a~í~= TNV
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ MPW=j~íÉêá~ä=mêçéÉêíáÉë= TOM
m~ÅâÉí=qóéÉ MQW=bäÉãÉåí=mêçéÉêíáÉë= TOO
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 19
pÉëëáçå=cáäÉLgçìêå~ä=cáäÉ= =TPV
fdbp=cáäÉ= =TQN
`çåÅÉéíë=çÑ=mêçÇìÅí=aÉÑáåáíáçå= TQN
`çåÅÉéíë=çÑ=íÜÉ=cáäÉ=píêìÅíìêÉ= TQO
m^qo^k=OKR=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë= =TQQ
aáëéä~ÅÉãÉåí=çê=cçêÅÉ=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë TQQ
p~ãéäÉ=aáëéä~ÅÉãÉåíLcçêÅÉ=oÉëìäíë=a~í~=cáäÉ= TQR
_áå~êó=sÉêëáçå= TQR
qÉñí=sÉêëáçå= TQS
kçÇ~ä=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë TQS
_áå~êó=sÉêëáçå= TQT
qÉñí=sÉêëáçå= TQT
p~ãéäÉ=kçÇ~ä=oÉëìäíë=a~í~=cáäÉ= TQT
bäÉãÉåí=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë TQU
_áå~êó=sÉêëáçå= TQU
qÉñí=sÉêëáçå= TQV
p~ãéäÉ=bäÉãÉåí=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉ= TQV
_É~ã=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉë TQV
p~ãéäÉ=_É~ã=oÉëìäíë=cáäÉ= TRM
Main Index
20 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
_áå~êó=sÉêëáçå= TRM
m^qo^k=OKR=oÉëìäíë=qÉãéä~íÉ=cáäÉë TRM
_= mêáåíáåÖ=léíáçåë
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå= =TRQ
aÉîáÅÉJÇÉéÉåÇÉåí=e~êÇÅçéó=cáäÉ= =TRR
^ÇÇáíáçå~ä=fåÑçêã~íáçå=Ñçê=mêáåíÉêëLmäçííÉêë= =TRS
fÑ=vçìê=mäçí=açÉë=kçí=qìêå=lìí=~ë=bñéÉÅíÉÇ= =TRT
e~êÇï~êÉ=pÉíìé= =TRU
pìééçêíÉÇ=e~êÇï~êÉ=Ñçê=m~íê~å=e~êÇÅçéó= =TRV
`= j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë
pìãã~êó=çÑ=j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë= =TSO
lîÉêîáÉï TSO
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=Ñçê=Pa=jçÇÉäë= TSQ
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=Ñçê=Oa=^ñáëóããÉíêáÅ=jçÇÉäë= TSQ
j~ëë=mêçéÉêíáÉë=Ñçê=Oa=mä~åÉ=píêÉëë=~åÇ=Oa=mä~åÉ=píê~áå=jçÇÉäë= TSQ
a= iáëí=mêçÅÉëëçê
råÇÉêëí~åÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=iáëí=mêçÅÉëëçê= =TSS
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå TSS
dÉçãÉíêó TST
mçáåíë= TST
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=ïÜáÅÜ=~äêÉ~Çó=Éñáëí=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TST
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=Äó=êÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÑáåáíÉ=ÉäÉãÉåí=åçÇÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=Éñáëí=ïÜÉêÉ=~=
éçáåí=áë=íç=ÄÉ=äçÅ~íÉÇ= TSU
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=Äó=ëÉäÉÅíáçå=ãÉÅÜ~åáëã=ëÅêÉÉå=éçëáíáçå=éáÅâë= TSV
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=Äó=ÇÉÑáåáåÖ=íÜÉáê=P=ÅççêÇáå~íÉë= TTM
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=áåíÉêëÉÅíáçå=çÑ=íïç=ÅìêîÉë= TTN
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=áåíÉêëÉÅíáçå=çÑ=~=ÅìêîÉ=~åÇ=~=ëìêÑ~ÅÉ=
TTP
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=ÅäçëÉëí=~ééêç~ÅÜ=çÑ=~=éçáåí=íç=~=ÅìêîÉ=
TTR
Main Index
`lkqbkqp 21
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=éçáåíë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=ÅäçëÉëí=~ééêç~ÅÜ=çÑ=~=éçáåí=íç=~=ëìêÑ~ÅÉ=
TTU
`ìêîÉë= TUN
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÅìêîÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=~äêÉ~Çó=Éñáëí=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TUN
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÅìêîÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=Éñáëí=~ë=íÜÉ=ÉÇÖÉë=çÑ=çíÜÉê=ÉåíáíáÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=Éñáëí=áå=
íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TUO
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÅìêîÉë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=~=ëíê~áÖÜí=äáåÉ=ÄÉíïÉÉå=íïç=éçáåíë= TUP
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÅìêîÉë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=áåíÉêëÉÅíáçå=çÑ=íïç=ëìêÑ~ÅÉë= TUR
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=~=ÅìêîÉ=~åÇ=~=é~ê~ãÉíêáÅ=äçÅ~íáçå=~äçåÖ=íÜÉ=ÅìêîÉ= TUT
pìêÑ~ÅÉë= TUU
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ëìêÑ~ÅÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=~äêÉ~Çó=Éñáëí=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TUU
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ëìêÑ~ÅÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=Éñáëí=~ë=íÜÉ=Ñ~ÅÉë=çÑ=çíÜÉê=ÉåíáíáÉë=ïÜáÅÜ=Éñáëí=áå=
íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TUV
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ëìêÑ~ÅÉë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íïç=ÅìêîÉë= TUV
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=~=ëìêÑ~ÅÉ=~åÇ=~=é~ê~ãÉíêáÅ=äçÅ~íáçå=çå=íÜÉ=ëìêÑ~ÅÉ= TVN
pçäáÇë= TVP
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ëçäáÇë=ïÜáÅÜ=~äêÉ~Çó=Éñáëí=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TVP
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ëçäáÇë=ÇÉÑáåÉÇ=Äó=íïç=ëìêÑ~ÅÉë= TVP
cáåáíÉ=bäÉãÉåíë TVR
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=åçÇÉë=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TVR
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÉäÉãÉåíë=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ=Äó=íÜÉáê=ä~ÄÉäë= TVS
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ÉäÉãÉåíë=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ=Äó=íÜÉáê=~ííêáÄìíÉë= TVS
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=ãìäíáJéçáåí=Åçåëíê~áåíë=Ejm`ëF=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~Ä~ëÉ= TVV
jáëÅÉää~åÉçìë UMM
oÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=~=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=Ñê~ãÉ= UMM
aÉÑáåáåÖ=~å=~ñáë=Äó=êÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=~=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=Ñê~ãÉ= UMN
aÉÑáåáåÖ=~å=~ñáë=Äó=êÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=íïç=éçáåíë= UMN
aÉÑáåáåÖ=~=îÉÅíçê=Äó=êÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=~=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=Ñê~ãÉ= UMP
aÉÑáåáåÖ=~=îÉÅíçê=Äó=êÉÑÉêÉåÅáåÖ=íïç=éçáåíë= UMQ
aÉÑáåáåÖ=~=îÉÅíçê=Äó=êÉÑÉêêáåÖ=íç=íÜêÉÉ=Çáëéä~ÅÉãÉåíë= UMT
fkabu
Main Index
22 m~íê~å=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä
Main Index
Ch. 1: Introduction to Patran Patran Reference Manual
1 Introduction to Patran
HTML Based Online Help 7
Patran Framework 3
Using Patran for Engineering Analysis 6
Main Index
2 Patran Reference Manual
Introducing Patran
Analysis Modules
Integrated analysis capabilities for structural, thermal, fatigue, and other types of mechanical analysis.
Analysis Preferences
Linkage to commercial analysis solvers and proprietary in-house codes, all functions, definitions,
properties, and code forms adapted to solvers.
MSC.Mvision
Integrated materials database.
Online Help/Documentation
Topical and context-sensitive help for all interactive features, functions, and applications, hypertext links
throughout the online system for instant information retrieval.
Main Index
Ch. 1: Introduction to Patran 3
Patran Framework
Some of these features are activated through menu keywords, icons, and application windows. Others,
such as PCL development, utilize some more advanced programming know-how.
File management options include creating new databases, opening, saving, and closing existing
databases, and accessing external files.
Groups
A group is a collection of selected geometric or finite element entities brought together to simplify
working with a number of entities simultaneously. Groups can be created and dissolved, displayed or
hidden, transformed (e.g., rotated, mirrored), and have entities added or removed.
A special benefit of groups is evident in the design of symmetrical parts or assemblies. As an example,
if in the design of the front suspension system of an automobile the entities of the left front suspension
assembly are identified as a group, then the identical right front suspension assembly can be modeled by
Main Index
4 Patran Reference Manual
Patran Framework
a simple mirror transformation. Both groups can then be used in a complete vibration analysis to predict
dynamic response, stress, and fatigue life of the suspension components.
Viewports
A viewport is a named graphics window through which you look at a model.You may utilize a number
of viewports to visualize different phases of the project. For example, in one viewport you can show the
entire geometric model, in another you can magnify a small detail. Additional viewports may contain a
finite element model or annotated result displays.
Viewports are especially useful for presenting “before” and “after” pictures simultaneously. For
example, following a thermoelastic stress analysis you may choose to post three viewports to the screen,
the first to show the geometric model, the second the meshed model with applied thermal loads, and the
third to display a plot of the resulting stresses.
You can control how the model appears in a view, its orientation, scale, rendering style, the presence of
labels, the position and intensity of the light source, and other display features.
User Customization
PCL enables you to automate repetitive tasks, establish individualized startup configurations, and create
new menus, icons, and forms. With PCL, you can readily integrate proprietary analysis codes developed
at your site into the Patran environment with the following results:
• New analysis code names, as well as code-specific properties and functional assignments, will
appear on appropriate forms.
• Finite element models created in an Patran database can be extracted and transferred to a
proprietary program for analysis. Conversely, finite element models and analysis results created
with an in-house program can be loaded directly into the Patran database.
• Database templates can be customized to suit individual requirements.
Main Index
Ch. 1: Introduction to Patran 5
Patran Framework
• Mouse communication. Click on menu keywords, icons, and buttons to identify selections. Pick
and manipulate objects in viewports; resize, reposition, and iconify (make into an icon)
viewports; copy and paste text.
• Keyboard communication. Use shortcuts to open menus and to accelerate keyword selections,
edit history list commands, enter special comments and commands on the command line.
Main Index
6 Patran Reference Manual
Using Patran for Engineering Analysis
Geometry
Patran provides a complete set of tools to build, modify, and parameterize geometric entities of a model.
In addition, Patran can operate directly on geometry you created in various CAD systems or imported via
IGES geometry files.
Functional Assignments
Functional assignments is a collective term for applied loads, boundary conditions, element properties,
and material properties. These can be applied either to the finite element model or directly to the
geometric model. The advantage of being able to associate functional assignments, for example loads,
with a geometric model is that you can experiment with any number of meshing configurations without
the need to reapply loads each time you change the mesh.
Analysis
Patran provides flexibility and tight integration with a number of finite element analysis codes.
Postprocessing
Postprocessing capabilities include visualization of the deformed model, various color plot displays, X-
Y curve outputs, and results animation. Numerical results data can be combined, scaled, and sorted by
time step, frequency, temperature or spatial location. For example, you can request the display of the
resulting von Mises stresses between 15,000 psi and 30,000 psi at 154 Hz in the second mode of
vibration. The Insight application condenses raw numerical data into extensive sophisticated graphical
tools and displays for complete accurate interpretation of results.
Main Index
Help>... 7
HTML Based Online Help
Help>...
Contents and Index Opens a new Browser window and displays the entire contents of the
Help system.
PCL Accesses all PCL Help with a separate contents list and index.
On Help Provides additional details on using Patran Help and navigating the
contents.
Technical Support Directs you in obtaining the technical support you might need.
What’s New in Patran Reports the key highlights and describes all the new features for
Patran.
About Patran Contains the version and legal notices for the Patran product software.
via WWW Links you to the MSC Software website for information on key topics.
Context-Sensitive Help
To quickly access Help on any topic (form) from within Patran, simply press the F1 key. The appropriate
Help topic will appear in a new Browser window on your screen.
Main Index
8 Help>...
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace Patran Reference Manual
2 Patran Workspace
Modeling Window 10
The Menu Bar 12
The Tool Bar 14
The Applications Bar 21
History Window and Command Line 22
Main Index
10 Patran Reference Manual
Modeling Window
Patran operations. The modeling window consists of two major sections, the Patran Main Form and the
graphics viewport.
History List
Command Line
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 11
Modeling Window
Graphics Viewport
The graphics viewport is a window where the geometric model, finite element model, and finite element
analysis results are displayed.
Origin Marker
Z X
Main Index
12 Patran Reference Manual
The Menu Bar
File
The File menu provides access to the many different files used in Patran. File manipulation
functionalities include database management, import and export processes, session file handling,
hardcopy creation, and session exiting.
Group
The Group menu enables you to create named groups of selected geometric or finite element entities with
common characteristics. Grouping makes it possible to visually differentiate sets of entities from one
another, as well as to perform various tasks on a number of like entities at the same time. With the Group
menu you can also modify, transform, or dissolve groups.
Viewport
A viewport is a named graphics window through which you look at a model. You may define any number
of independent views of different extent and location and each may contain the model, or a portion of the
model, in a specific position and display size. The Viewport menu serves to create, modify, and delete
viewports.
Viewing
The Viewing menu manages the position, orientation, and sizing of the view of a model in selected
viewports.
Display
The Display menu commands control visualization features such as colors, labels, and highlights of
model entities in viewports.
Preferences
The Preferences menu sets the global parameters for a model’s definition and appearance.
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 13
The Menu Bar
Tools
The Tools menu provides access to Patran’s special functions (e.g. Mass Properties) as well as to optional
analysis modules that are available on your system.
Help
The Help menu retrieves online documentation for all Patran features and provides various operational
tips, such as keyboard shortcuts, mouse functions, as well as tutorial assistance.
Main Index
14 Patran Reference Manual
The Tool Bar
To move a tool palette, click on its outer boundary and drag to any other part of the window.
You can create new icons and function definitions to add to the tool bar. Copy the tool bar definition file
p3toolbar.def from the installation directory into your home directory where you can make your
modifications. The new file will then be used whenever you start up Patran.
File>New Brings up the New Database form where you can define a new
model.
File>Open Brings up the Open Database form where you pick an existing
database.
File>Save Saves the database with its current name and location.
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 15
The Tool Bar
Copy to Copies the image in the current viewport onto the clipboard
Clipboard
Undo Reverses the last command that added, modified, or deleted entities.
During a plot:
The graphic imaging process will suspend immediately, leaving a
partially displayed image. To restart the plot operation, press the
“Refresh Graphics” icon.
During meshing:
All completely meshed regions will remain intact. The last
geometric region whose meshing was interrupted will not be
meshed.
This button acts on all posted viewports if the Display mode is set
to Entity Type. However, if the display is in Group mode, only the
groups posted in the current window will be affected.
Refresh Redisplays the contents of the screen.
Graphics
Main Index
16 Patran Reference Manual
The Tool Bar
Heart Beat Color-coded indicator that shows the current status of Patran.
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 17
The Tool Bar
Fit View--resizes the view so that all model entities fit inside the viewport window.
Model Center-- sets the rotation center to the centroid of entities in the view.
Main Index
18 Patran Reference Manual
The Tool Bar
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 19
The Tool Bar
Front View--Rotations: X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0
Main Index
20 Patran Reference Manual
The Tool Bar
Main Index
Ch. 2: Patran Workspace 21
The Applications Bar
Application Buttons
Main Index
22 Patran Reference Manual
History Window and Command Line
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons 24
Selecting Entities 33
The List Processor 43
Main Index
24 Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
The term widget is a programmers’ jargon; it refers to all buttons, switches, listboxes, spreadsheets,
etc. displayed in forms, as well as to the forms themselves. Patran is so designed that the term widget
should not appear except where it is unavoidable, such as when custom interfaces or environments are
created.
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 25
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Main Index
26 Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Apply Button
Apply or -Apply-
Implements all inputs and selections you specified in a form. The slight difference between the text of
the two buttons-- in the second one the word is offset by dashes--indicates a difference in their functions.
When you see the “-Apply-” button used in a form it means that:
• This action is reversible--you can use Undo (System Tool Palette, 14) to reverse the operation.
• this action activates a commit--saves the results of all actions performed (including the current
one) since the last time the database was saved.
Conversely, if a form contains an “Apply” button without the dashes, the action of that application cannot
be undone and it does not commit previous actions to the database. After either Apply action, the form
stays open for further inputs.
Auto Execute
Auto Execute
When the Auto Execute switch is ON, the Apply button is executed automatically when all required
parameters are entered on the input form.
Auto Execute is useful if immediate results are desirable. However, if you want to be more cautious and
double check all inputs before executing a command, turn this function OFF by clicking in the box.
Cancel Button
Cancel
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 27
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Closes a form and voids all inputs and changes you made just before canceling.
Coordinate Frame
Allows you to enter the name of the coordinate frame in which the coordinate input is interpreted (for
more information on coordinate frames see Coordinate Frame (p. 27) in the Patran Reference Manual).
Databox
Many forms contain databoxes that accomodate a list of input data. The label identifies the type of data
that will be accepted in a particular databox. A blinking insertion bar in the data field indicates that the
focus is in the databox and it is ready to receive input. If the input involves entities on the screen, you can
pick the appropriate entities and the system will enter their name and ID number. Alternatively, you may
type or paste the required input data into the data field.
Default Values
Application forms often contain default values and settings. The types of defaults are:
• fixed (global)-- automatically set for a new database
• variable-- created during model construction
When you access a form for the first time, it will show the global default values. If you enter new defaults
or create new settings and invoke Apply, these will appear as defaults the next time you open the form.
Steps to modify a fixed default environment:
1. Open a new database.
2. Change all default settings as desired: colors, viewports, groups, analysis preference, named
views, etc.
3. Save the database under some name (e.g., “my_template”). Make note of the path of this new
file so that you can find it next time.
To apply the new default environment in a new database:
1. In the New Database form, select Change Template...
Main Index
28 Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
2. In the Change Template form, change the default path, if necessary, to wherever
“my_template.db” resides. Use the filter to locate it and select it from the database list.
3. Enter a new database name and pick OK. The new database will open in the
“my_template.db” environment.
Filter
* Filter
A filter is used in applications where a list of selectable components may be longer than the number of
items that can be displayed in a listbox. With the filter you can isolate a single item or a group of several
items that comprise a subset of the list. For example, you may have defined a number of load cases, one
of them named Heavy. To access this load case (for example, to modify it), you don’t need to scroll
through a long list to find its name in the listbox, instead, type heavy (entries are not case sensitive), press
the Filter button, and this load case will be selected.
You can use the following wildcard symbols:
* (any character string)
? (a single character)
If, in the above example three of the load cases are named Heavy100, heavy300, and heavy500, you can
enter h* and now the displayed list will be the subset that consists of the load cases whose name begins
with the letter h.
OK Button
OK or - OK -
The OK button performs almost exactly as the Apply button, except that it also closes the form.
Output ID List
Element ID List
51
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 29
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Output ID lists display the default ID number that will be assigned to the next entity of a given type.
However, you may enter any other number if you wish. If the number you specify is higher than the
default, numbering will begin at this new number. If you enter a lower number, you will be warned that
these entities exist and will be asked for permission to overwrite. You can specify any numbering
sequence, for example you can choose 44 68 77 and 92 for the next four entities. Spaces are used as
delimiters.
Reset Button
Reset Reset
When you press this button, anything you changed in a form will return to its previous value.
Scroll Bar
Scroll bars appear below or at the right side of listboxes. They are used when the contents of the box are
too long or too wide to appear in their entirety.
Switch Button
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
With the switch buttons you can select one option in a short list of options. The options are mutually
exclusive.
Toggle Button
Lights
A Toggle button is a switch that allows you to turn a particular option or selection ON or OFF. The label
identifies the option (e.g., Lights). The toggle switch operates in a press on/press off manner.
Main Index
30 Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Spreadsheets
Tabular Data Input Spreadsheets
This type of spreadsheet is used to input data into a one-, two-, or three-dimensional table.
Input Data
Data
X Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OK
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 31
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
3. Press the Enter key. The input data will appear in the selected cell and the selection box will move
down one level.
Note: Spreadsheets display at a default maximum size. If a larger size is required, look for a local
Options... menu to increase the setting.
1. 6 UX
1. 44 UZ
Coefficient = 1
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 1
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Main Index
32 Patran Reference Manual
Forms, Widgets, and Buttons
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 33
Selecting Entities
Curve List
If the insertion bar is not already blinking, you must click inside the blank form field before you can select
the entities.
Screen Picking
When you pick entities with the cursor, you can select them individually or pick several entities at the
same time. After selection has been completed, the system will write the names and ID numbers of the
selected entities into the databox that initiated the picking.
Some of the settings of screen picking, such as highlighting, criteria of entity inclusion in picked areas,
and the format of a Select Menu, are established in the Preferences >Picking menu (see
Preferences>Picking, 455).
Main Index
34 Patran Reference Manual
Selecting Entities
B
Polygon Picking
The enclosure is in the shape of a polygon. Click the polygon icon in the Select Menu (see
Preferences>Picking, 455) pick the start point of the polygon (A), then drag the cursor and pick the next
point to set a new vertex of the polygon (B). As the lines of the polygon are formed, continue clicking
new vertices (C,D,E...) until you consider the polygon complete. Double-click at the last vertex (or return
to the starting point) to complete the polygon.
Another way of initiating the polygon pick is using the Ctrl key instead of picking the polygon icon. Press
and hold down this key while you click the left mouse button at a start point and all consecutive points
of the polygon. Double click to close the polygon.
A B
E D
Cycle Picking
Entity picks, whether single or multiple, may inadvertently catch entities you did not intend to select,
especially if several entities are close to one another. The system will make it easier to pick the correct
entity from a number of possible choices, provided that the auto execute feature is turned off. A form will
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 35
Selecting Entities
be displayed with the names of all possible selections. You can cycle through all choices until you pick
the desired entity.
Selection
Surface 3
Surface 2
Previous Next
Note: By using the right mouse button (RMB) on a selected entity, a contextual menu appears
giving access to a number of commonly used utilities or functions related to the selected
entity or entities.
Select Menu
When you invoke a command that requires entity selection (e.g. Delete), the system will display a Select
Menu. A Select Menu consists of two sets of icons, the first set is common to all select operations, the
second set consists of icons specific to either geometry or FEM entity selections. A typical Select Menu
is shown below; the explanation of the Select icons will follow.
Main Index
36 Patran Reference Manual
Selecting Entities
In certain applications you may want to restrict entity selection to only those parts of the model that
would be visible in a hidden or shaded mode. In that case, you can specify visible entity picking with the
icon at the beginning of the select menu. This icon toggles the visible entity picking function ON or OFF.
It is not required that the model be rendered in hidden or shaded style, and all the other entity picking
processes remain unchanged when the visible entity toggle is turned ON.
The following entities are supported in the visible entity selection mode:
Geometry FEM
• Curves • Nodes
• Points and vertices of geometry • Elements
• Solids • Edges of shell and solid elements
• Surfaces • Faces of solid elements
• Faces of solids
• Edges of surfaces and solids
Note: When Visible Entity Picking is selected, the Rectangle/Polygon Picking (Multiple), 456
mode will pick any portion of the entity enclosed by the rectangle. The Enclose entire
entity and Enclose centroid modes are ignored.
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 37
Selecting Entities
Picking Icons
When you pick an entity, its name is entered in the select databox. By default, if you follow with another
entity pick, the previous selection will be canceled and the second selection will replace the first. This is
called Replace Pick. However, with the Add Pick icon option, further selections do not replace existing
ones but are added to the selection list. Lastly, the Reject Pick option allows you to remove a previously
selected entity from the entity list in the Select databox.
Replace Pick--replaces a selected entity with the next entity you picked (default)
Reject Pick--removes a selected entity from the list of entities already picked
“Any” Icon
This icon helps you control the entity picks in all select menus. If the action is associated with several
unlike entities, the icon will indicate that any geometric or finite element entity (but not both) is
selectable. For example to delete a solid, a curve, and two points, in the Geometry application you select
Delete>Any and the “Any” icon will consider all geometric entities relative to the enclosure you create.
If, however, you want to restrict the action to entities of a certain type only, you can specify the entity
type for your selection (for example Delete>Solid) and the “Any” selection will refer only to the selected
entity type (in this example to any solid). Assuming that the same four entities (solid, a curve, and two
points) are in the enclosure, just as before, this time only the solid will be deleted and the others will
remain untouched.
Main Index
38 Patran Reference Manual
Selecting Entities
points. At the completion of this action you may want to return to the previous Select menu or to the
original Select menu that started all selections (for example, to select a geometric entity).
Go to Root Menu Icon This icon will return you to the Select menu where you
started the action.
Go to Previous Menu The role of this icon is similar to the Go to Root Menu icon,
Icon except that it returns you to a previously selected menu in a
multi-level definition. (the previously selected Select Menu
may or may not be the root menu).
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 39
Selecting Entities
Selects the default coordinate frame and enters it in the Select databox.
Specifies a vector whose base is at the global origin and tip at an arbitrary point. Displays the
Point select icons to select this point.
Specifies a vector whose base and tip are both arbitrary points. Displays the Point select icons
to select both points.
Selecting Points
The following icons enable you to select a point whether it is an existing entity or just a position in space.
Main Index
40 Patran Reference Manual
Selecting Entities
Selecting Curves
You will see these icons when you create new curves or when you need to select existing ones.
Selecting Solids
With these icons you can select solid geometry.
Selecting Surfaces
These icons are displayed for creating a surface or for selecting an existing surface.
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 41
Selecting Entities
Selects an edge-point on a
surface.
Selecting Nodes
This icon appears whenever you need to pick a node.
Selects nodes
Selecting Elements
These icons are displayed whenever you are selecting elements or parts of elements.
Main Index
42 Patran Reference Manual
Selecting Entities
Main Index
Ch. 3: Entering and Retrieving Data 43
The List Processor
Main Index
44 Patran Reference Manual
The List Processor
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats 46
The File Menu 57
File Commands 62
Main Index
46 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
Patran Database
This file contains the data that define your geometric and finite element model, as well as all analysis
results. Databases are binary files that are automatically assigned a .db file name extension (e.g.,
test.db). This extension must remain with the file name.
Session File
A session file is a log of all database related commands and corresponding comments executed during a
work session. A single session file may contain commands that were used for more than one database.
Session files are given a .ses.xx filename extension, where xx is a number that shows the position of
this session file in the sequential order of session files (e.g., test.ses.01= the first session
file). MSC recommends that you maintain the.ses extension, although this is not a strict
requirement.
Journal File
A journal file contains all database related commands executed while creating a specific model. A journal
file spans all sessions required to complete a model. Journal files are assigned a .jou extension (e.g.,
test.db.jou).
Hardcopy File
A hardcopy file is a generic file named patran.hrd that is used as an intermediate step to creating an
output file for specific print drivers, such as HP-GL and CGM.
IGES File
IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) files are ANSI standard formatted files that make it
possible to exchange data among most commercial CAD systems.
Patran supports a fixed line length ASCII file format, where the entire file is partitioned into lines of 80
characters in length, beginning with the first character in the file.
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 47
File Types and Formats
For more about importing Patran 2.5 Results Files, see Patran 2.5 Results Files, 46.
Startup Files
Patran relies on a set of required and optional external text files during the startup of a new session, as
follows:
The settings.pcl file, 47 is used to define a default environment for the Patran session. The environment
includes hardcopy parameter settings and operation of Patran’s 3D driver.
The p3prolog.pcl and p3epilog.pcl Files, 54 are used to customize and automate PCL capabilities within
Patran, and to provide a way for customized forms and widgets to be created.
Startup Session Files, 54. There are a number of ways to customize automatic execution of user defined
session files, or to specify the file name of a new session file to be written to by Patran with its startup
session file feature.
For more information on these user defined customization files for Patran, continue onto the following
sections.
Main Index
48 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
All of the entries in settings.pcl are written in PCL and most have calls to the PCL’s built-in
functions. The parameters of interest to most users are presented below. The default values are in
parentheses. For more information, please refer to File>Print (p. 217) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 49
File Types and Formats
Show_Icon_Help (True) True causes the popup help to be displayed when the
cursor is placed on an icon.
Save_Vis_History_Item_ True causes the number of displayed history lines to
Count (True) be saved between sessions.
Main Index
50 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 51
File Types and Formats
XDB Only
XDB and Print
OP2 Only
OP2 and Print
Print Only
None
Main Index
52 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 53
File Types and Formats
Main Index
54 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 55
File Types and Formats
These interfaces are made up of the system start-up file interface, the command line interface (both of
which are described here) and the session file forms. See File>Session, 215 interface.
Main Index
56 Patran Reference Manual
File Types and Formats
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 57
The File Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu key word with ellipses (...) attached to it will call up an additional form in which you enter further
data.
If a menu key word is followed by an expression containing the abbreviation Ctrl, this item can also be
accessed by an accelerated keyboard shortcut. For example, for File>New, the menu shows Ctrl N. This
means that, if desired, you can activate this command by pressing the Ctrl (Control) key and the
designated letter key (N) simultaneously instead of clicking File and then the New keyword.
Main Index
58 Patran Reference Manual
The File Menu
The File menu functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear in the menu.
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 59
The File Menu
New... Displays the New Database dialog box in which you enter the name of
a new model. The form presents the default md_template.db
template file; if desired, you can specify another previously defined
and saved template file.
pref_env_set_integer("max_num_recent_files",num_files)
Main Index
60 Patran Reference Manual
The File Menu
Save Although Patran updates an open database after each operation, the
last update step is not saved to disk, it remains in memory only. The
Save command ensures that the most recent update is included when
the current state of the database is committed to disk.
Save a Copy... Opens the Save a Copy form that enables you to save a copy of your
database under a new name.
Utilities
• Reclaim... Reclaims unused space allocated to the current database. Note that
when you reclaim database space the file’s Undo history will be
deleted.
• Revert... Returns a database to the state in which it existed when it was first
opened (provided that the Revert Operation has been enabled; see
Preferences>Global, 447). Changes made during the current session
will be lost.
• Rebuild... Executes a selected journal file (see Journal File, 46) to re-create an
Patran database. The rebuilt database remains open and allows you to
continue to work on the model. This command is useful when the
original database is either lost or not accessible (e.g., the database is
archived or resides on a different computer platform).
Import... Enables you to bring in model or results data created outside of the
current database. Model data may be in Patran database format, Patran
2.5 neutral file format, MD Nastran input file format, CAD format, or
Standard Data Exchange format. Import recognizes the following
CAD formats:
• CATIA
• Pro/ENGINEER
• Unigraphics
• Parasolid
• ACIS
Import results from a PATRAN 2.5 Results file (Element, Nodal or
Displacement Results file).
• Importing Results
Import recognizes the following Standard Data Exchange formats:
Main Index
Ch. 4: Working with Files 61
The File Menu
Export... Translates an open Patran database into an IGES file, STEP AP203
and AP209, Parasolid xmt, or a Patran neutral file, based on the entire
model, specific entity types, or Patran groups.
SimXpert This menu item appears if you have a valid installation of SimXpert
on your local system and the environment variable MSC_SX_HOME
is set pointing to the installation directory of SimXpert. Selecting this
option will launch SimXpert. If you wish to export a current model
to SimXpert, this can be done in the Analysis application with the
Action/Object/Method set to Analyze/Entire Model/Load SimXpert in
the MSC or MD Nastran preference.
SimManager From the SimManager menu you can Logon to your SimManager
installation, publish and retrieve data, and browse through data
already published to the database.
Session >
• Play... Executes a specified Patran session file (see Session File, 46) either in
its entirety or one command at a time for debugging or editing
purposes.
• Record... Creates a new file with a user-defined file name and records all
database related commands executed during the current Patran session
from the time this file was opened. The default md_patran.ses
session file will be generated as well.
Print... Sends the image of one or all viewports and/or XY plot windows to a
designated printer or creates a hardcopy file in order to print or plot at
a later time. Certain printing options are functions of the available
printers and print drivers.
Images... Creates graphical outputs of model displays in a variety of popular
graphics file formats, including interactive Internet-ready animations.
Report... Creates a printable text file that contains Patran model summary
information, node and element attributes, properties and results.
Quit Closes an open database, saves any changes made, and ends the active
session.
Main Index
62 Patran Reference Manual
File Commands
Look In
This text field displays the location where Patran starts looking for the various folders in which it can
create and manipulate databases, session files, and reports. The subordinate folders and existing database
names are also listed. If you don’t remember where your files are located, move up and down the
hierarchy of all folders with the Windows icons, the Windows Explorer, or use Start>Find>Files or
Folders on your Desktop to select the correct path for your database search.
File Name
Enter a new name or select a name from the displayed list. This text field, as well as the Files of Type
field, also shows the default extension automatically assigned to different kinds of files (e.g., *.db, for
database file). If you enter a name that already exists, you will be asked whether you would like to delete
the existing database and create a new one.
Naming Conventions
Although Patran does not impose any limitations on file names, certain restrictions do exist, mainly due
to the naming requirements of various CAD systems and translators, as well as analysis codes. Therefore,
it is best to avoid spaces and other special characters from file names. Also, be aware, that some analysis
programs limit the number of characters allowed in a file name and may truncate a longer name to the
allowable length.
Files of Type
This text field shows the file type appropriate for the selected action, as well as the automatically assigned
file name extension.
Main Index
File>New 63
Creating a New File
The File>New command sequence activates the New Database dialog box.
In addition to the file name inputs that are required, two optional data entries are:
• Change Template Button/Template Database Name
Main Index
64 File>New
Creating a New File
Change Template If you press this button the Database Template dialog box will display
all saved template database names. Select the template you want to
use. For more about templates, see New..., 59.
Modify Preferences Turn this toggle on (4) and the New Model Preferences form will be
presented right after the new database is created. In this form you can
specify a tolerance value (see Global Model Tolerance, 449), the
analysis code you intend to use, and the type of analysis you want to
perform on the model.
Changing a Template
The Database Template allows you to select a a previously defined and saved template file that will be
used as the source when a new database is created.
Main Index
File>New 65
Creating a New File
Modifying Preferences
The New Model Preference form allows you to select those preferences that must be set at the beginning
of the modeling process to avoid invalid input and irreversible results.
Main Index
66 File>New
Creating a New File
Tolerance Tolerance specifies the maximum distance within which two like
entities (e.g., points), are said to be coincident. Tolerance is a global
parameter, that is, it affects the entire modeling process.
Entity coincidences and congruences:
Main Index
File>New 67
Creating a New File
Maximum Model Enter the approximate maximum model size if you selected the Based
Dimension on Model tolerance definition.
Analysis Code Select the program you intend to use for the finite element analysis.
Analysis Type Select the type of analysis you will perform on the model.
Your selection of an analysis code, as well as the analysis type, will
affect all aspects of the finite element modeling process, since
analysis codes have their own unique definitions for element types,
MPC types, and all other FEM entities and properties.
Analysis Code and Analysis Type can also be defined in the Patran
Main Form’s Preferences menu.
Main Index
68 File>Open
Opening an Existing File
The File>Open command sequence activates the Open Database dialog box. Make sure you are
displaying the appropriate folder in which the database resides, then select the name of the database you
want to open.
Main Index
File>Save a Copy 69
Saving a Copy of a Database
Use this command to save a copy of your database under a different name.
Save Journal File Copy If you turn this toggle on (4), the journal file associated with the
Also database will also copy to the new database. Note that the copied
journal file will still refer to the name of the original database; you
must edit the name to refer to the copied database.
Look in: If you want to save the copy to a different folder, select the new folder.
File Name Enter a new name for the copied database.
Main Index
70 File>Reclaim
Freeing up Unused Disk Space
The Reclaim utility frees unused disk space allocated to the currently open database. Normally you may
not need to use this feature, since the Reclaim process is executed automatically when you save or close
a database that contains a significant amount of free space, provided that the following two conditions
are met:
• The database can be reduced by an estimated one megabyte or more.
• The current database fragmentation is more than 5% of the size of the total database.
Important: When you reclaim database space, the file’s Undo history is deleted. However, once the
reclaim process is complete, the Undo capability will be reestablished after the next
committed action and the database will again maintain Undo states.
When you request to reclaim database space, you will receive the following a message:
Whether you proceed with the reclaim utility or not will depend on what is more valuable, the amount of
database space you can recover or retaining the Undo history of your file.
Main Index
File>Revert 71
Reverting to the Original Database
This utility erases all changes made during the current session and returns a database to the state in which
it existed when it was first opened.
The Revert utility is not automatically active. To make it available, you must do the following:
1. Select the Preferences menu in the Main Form.
2. Pick the keyword Global.
3. Click on the toggle in the selection box (4) Enable Revert Operation. This action will take effect
when you next open this database.
4. Close the database.
5. Open the file; revert will be available in the database. Proceed creating entities.
6. If you want to return to the original state of the database, click File>Utilities>Revert.
7. The following message will appear:
Main Index
72 File>Rebuild
Rebuilding a Model from a Journal File
With this utility, you can rebuild a model created in Patran using a journal file. The journal file contains
a history of all user activity required to create the database, even if it spanned several separate modeling
sessions. Because it is a sequential text file of PCL instructions, it can be edited using a text editor.
This utility is available only if there is no open Patran file. When you invoke File>Utilities>Rebuild, the
Rebuild Database dialog box will display the list of journal files contained in the last-used folder (you
can search through other folders as well).
Select the journal file to run. Once a journal file is read and executed, the database will be completely
restored.
Main Index
File>Import 73
Importing Models and Results
With the File>Import command you can bring in model or results data created outside of the current
database. If the imported object is specified as Model, the Import dialog box buttons and text boxes are
related to model import choices. Imported model files may come from a number of different sources,
therefore model data may be in Patran database format, Patran 2.5 neutral file format, MD Nastran input
file format, or in one of several CAD formats.
Look in: Shows the drive or folder where the search starts for the incoming
database. The text field below displays the folders and files where you
may locate this database.
File name Select the name of the file you want to import.
Files of type Indicates the valid file type and assigned file name extension, unique
to the selected source of the imported file.
Source Identifies the software application used to create the imported model.
Main Index
74 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Options Although this item is dependent on the source file origin, it generally
leads to a spreadsheet or a form that displays application-specific
information about imported entities.
Equivalence Options Allows you to select methods and conditions for merging coincident
nodes.
Preview Patran Database Displays a list of the number of entities and their ID specifications in
the database targeted for import.
Main Index
File>Import 75
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
76 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Spreadsheet Headings
Default Offset
Indicates the amount by which the ID numbers of the incoming entities of the corresponding type will be
incremented in the current database. A large offset makes it easier to group IDs for imported submodels
and organize the database. The Default Offset is the product of the Increment and the Submodel number.
Increment
An arbitrary offset increment you assign.
Submodel
The number of successful imports; this number is incremented after each subsequent import. If desired,
it can also be overridden by any arbitrary number.
Default Prefix
Indicates an alphanumeric prefix applied to incoming entity names. It may be used to organize the
database based on each imported submodel. The Default Prefix is a concatenation of the Prefix and the
Submodel number.
Main Index
File>Import 77
Importing Models and Results
Prefix
An arbitrary prefix that must start with a letter. The default, SM_, stands for submodel.
Submodel
The Submodel number, incremented after each successful import.
Main Index
78 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
will be added to the group in the primary database. A new group is created to contain all entities from the
imported database. This group is given the name specified by the entity prefix.
Entities to Merge Upon In these cells you specify the entities you want to merge if a duplicate
Duplication name is encountered. If you do not click the merge toggle (or if the
merge attempt fails), a prefix will be inserted in front of the name and
a new entity will be created to hold the data.
For those entities with a “Compare Names” toggle, click the ones that
must have duplicate names to merge. If this toggle is ON, the entities
in the primary and secondary databases must have the same name and
the same data to merge.
0.234516E+08 0.234925E+08
But, the following are not:
0.233925E+08 0.234925E+08
Spreadsheet Cells
The cells in the spreadsheet identify the imported entities and specify certain characteristics.
Main Index
File>Import 79
Importing Models and Results
Import Column
In the Import column you select which entities of a given type are to be imported from the external
database (All, None or a List). Group membership provides additional control of entities. For entities that
can be placed in groups, if All or a List of groups is specified only those entities that are in the selected
groups will be imported. If None is specified for groups, group membership is not a consideration.
For example, if you select All for Elements, and All for groups, and if Element 100 is not in any group,
Element 100 will not be imported. However, if you pick All for Elements, and None for groups, Element
100, which is not in any group, will be imported.
Main Index
80 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
If you select a single cell, a second dialog box will provide a set of options.
Entities to Import With each listed entity type, you can choose to import all entities of a
give type, none of them, or those specified in an input list. If you set
the switch to Input, you enable the List databox and may input a list
manually.
<entity> List Enter the desired list of entities. This label will vary according to the
entity type you selected (e.g., Curve List).
Preview Database. . . Displays the Patran Database Preview form that shows the entities,
and their corresponding ID numbers, as contained in the import
database.
These columns show the range of identification numbers for the corresponding entity type in the current
(receiving) database. Seeing these numbers may help you decide what ID offset values are most
appropriate for that entity type.
Main Index
File>Import 81
Importing Models and Results
ID Offset Column
This column indicates the number by which the IDs of the incoming entities are to be incremented
relative to the entities of the corresponding type that exist in the current database.
Main Index
82 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Offset Options
If you select an ID Offset cell, a second dialog box will provide a set of options.
Main Index
File>Import 83
Importing Models and Results
This column shows the prefix that is to be applied to incoming entity names. If the merge toggle for the
corresponding entity type is ON, a prefix is applied only if the name duplicates the name of another entity
in the current database and the merge operation failed due to conflicting data. See Duplicate Entity Merge
Options, 77 for more details.
Main Index
84 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Equivalence Options
Equivalencing is a process in finite element modeling whereby all coincident nodes are reduced to a
single node. Two nodes are coincident if they are within a predetermined tolerance distance from each
other (the number of significant digits for the equivalence tolerance is set in the Import Options form, see
Significant Digits, 78). The change brought about when nodes are equivalenced is propagated throughout
all other FEM definitions, (element connectivity definitions, MPC equations, loads and boundary
conditions), geometry definitions, and groups.
ID Numbers
By default, the highest coincident node ID at a location in the secondary model will equivalence to the
highest coincident node ID in the primary model.
Main Index
File>Import 85
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
86 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 87
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
88 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
invoked either from the Import dialog box or from the Import Filter Options form. If desired, you can
generate a named report file from the information displayed in the spreadsheet.
Main Index
File>Import 89
Importing Models and Results
File Formats, 711 provides more information about the neutral file system.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Neutral Options Brings up the Neutral Import Options form that enables you to select
the types of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
90 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Define Offsets... Select this button if the likelihood of entity ID duplication exists (e.g.,
when several neutral files are imported). It will activate the Entity
Label Offset Definition form in which you can specify offsets to
avoid conflicting IDs.
Main Index
File>Import 91
Importing Models and Results
Assigning Offsets
Same for all entity types:
• click on Offset, type the offset in the Input Offset Value data, press Enter, or
• pick Automatic Offset to let the system assign offset automatically.
Unique value to each entity type:
Main Index
92 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
• click on an entity, type the offset in the Input Offset Value data field, press Enter, or
• select Automatic Offset.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
MD Nastran Options Brings up the Entity Selection form that enables you to select the types
of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
File>Import 93
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
94 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 95
Importing Models and Results
Assigning Offsets
Same for all entity types:
• click on Offset, type the offset in the Input Offset Value data, press Enter, or
• pick Automatic Offset to let the system assign offset automatically
Main Index
96 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Express Options Brings up the Express Import Options form where you can select the
type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
File>Import 97
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
98 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences Activates the Import Preferences dialog box in which you can specify
how certain geometric entities will be represented in the Patran
database.
Entity Types Identifies the classes of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Types Specifies the various kinds of entities available within the entity class
you selected (for example, if the Entity Type you selected was Solid,
the Geometry Type may be Solid of Revolution)
Entity Colors Provides a color filter to further differentiate entities selected for
import.
Entity Layers
All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
Layer Numbers Turn All Layers OFF and identify the layers on which the imported
entities reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Preview Express File... Allows you to display the contents of the import file to inspect prior to
actually bringing it into your database.
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
EXPRESS file with _Ln appended. For example, if the EXPRESS file
name is test.model and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups
will be named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers,
111 for additional information.
Main Index
File>Import 99
Importing Models and Results
Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database (simply trimmed or general trimmed).
Solid Representation Solids may appear in boundary representation (B-rep Solids) or as a
collection of constituent surfaces. The Parameterized Solid option
allows B-rep solids, whose faces are biparametric surfaces, to be
automatically converted to triparametric solids.
Enable Tolerance Prompt If OFF (default), global model tolerance is calculated based on the
expected maximum model size (see Global Model Tolerance, 449),
without prompting for a response.
Enable Geometry Tracking If ON, a geometry tracking log file will be created to describe
geometric attributes of imported geometry.
Import Action
• Import Geometry Executes geometry import.
• Calculate Model Processes the file to help determine the best tolerance for geometry
Tolerance import.
Main Index
100 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 101
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
102 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 103
Importing Models and Results
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
IGES Options Brings up the IGES Import Options form that enables you to specify
the types and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
104 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 105
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
106 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the geometric or finite element entities you can import.
Entity Attributes
• Curve on Surface Stipulate your preference as to how trimming curves should be
Preferences represented on trimmed surfaces:
Main Index
File>Import 107
Importing Models and Results
Color Definition Entity IGES entities may refer to an IGES Color Definition Entity (Type 314)
that defines the color of entities.
Main Index
108 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 109
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
110 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 111
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
112 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Geometry Import Icons Select the block icon (UNIX only) to import CATIA geometry.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
CATIA Options Brings up the CATIA Import Options form that enables you to select
the type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Import to Parasolid If ON, CATIA V4 models are imported in a Parasolid geometry
format. CATIA V5 models will always be imported in Parasolid
format and CATXPRES models will not be imported in Parasolid
format.
File Type Specifies the type of the imported input file. This may be a CATIA V4
model file (.Model extension), a CATIA V5 part file (.CATPart
extension), a CATIA V5 product file (.CATProduct extension), or a
CATXPRES output file (.cat extension).
Main Index
File>Import 113
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
114 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 115
Importing Models and Results
Import Geometry The default, Import Geometry will import the geometry after the
Apply button is selected on the import form. The secondary toggle,
Import Preview will run the translator and provide a summary of
geometry and layer information without importing the geometry.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Import NoShow Entities If on, CATIA V4 entities that are classified as “NoShow” will be
imported.
Import Attributes If ON, attributes attached to the geometry will be imported. Turning
Import Attributes OFF will improve import performance.
Entity Layers
• All Layers If on, all geometry will be imported regardless of whether or not the
geometry is on layers.
• Layer numbers Specify which layers in CATIA V4 to import geometry from.
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
CATIA file with _Ln appended. For example, if the CATIA file name
is test.model and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups will be
named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers, 111 for
additional information.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Main Index
116 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
Main Index
File>Import 117
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
118 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 119
Importing Models and Results
Import Geometry The default, Import Geometry will import the geometry after the
Apply button is selected on the import form. The secondary toggle,
Import Preview will run the translator and provide a summary of
geometry and layer information without importing the geometry.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Import Attributes If this toggle is ON (the default), attributes attached to the geometry,
including layer attributes, will be imported. Turning Import Attributes
OFF improves import performance.
Attribute Name Types Patran will create a string attribute and attach it to geometry associated
with a CATIA V5 publication, feature name, or publication and
Feature Name by selecting "Publication", "Feature Name", or both.
If you unselect both "Publication" and "Feature Name", no attributes
will be created. If you select both, the CATIA V5 Tree structure will
be imported as Hierarchical groups. An example is shown below.
Main Index
120 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Example Scenario 1:
P1.CATPart with a Part ID of P1 containing two entities;
• A feature named Loft.1 with a published name PUB_EDGE,
• A feature named SURFACE_FEATURE.
Main Index
File>Import 121
Importing Models and Results
Example Scenario 2:
A CATProduct file with a product id of BLISKPROD contains a subproduct file with an instance name
of BLISKSUBPROD.1 and a CATPart file with an instance name of DAM3.1 that contains two
entities,
• A feature named Blisk.1 with a published name BLISK_ONE,
• A feature named Blisk.2 with a published name BLISK_TWO.
Main Index
122 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
CATIA file with _Ln appended. For example, if the CATIA file name
is test.CATPart and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups will
be named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers, 111
for additional information.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities. The Import to Group Hierarchy toggle needs to
be on if CATIA V5 tree structures are to be imported. This is ON by
default. See the next section.
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
In order to retrieve these attributes from the Patran database, there are two functions that may be used:
Main Index
File>Import 123
Importing Models and Results
ps_get_body_string_attribute, 63 and ps_get_string_attribute (p. 64) in the PCL Reference Manual. For
examples of how these functions are utilized please see, ps_get_body_string_attribute, 17 and
ps_get_string_attribute (p. 18) in the PCL Reference Manual Examples.
Main Index
124 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 125
Importing Models and Results
Once the CATIA V5 file is imported the tree is accessible as Patran heirarchical groups. For display
purposes, these groups can be turned on and off (posted and unposted).
Main Index
126 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 127
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences Activates a dialog box in which you can specify how certain geometric
entities will be represented in the Patran database.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
Main Index
128 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Layer Numbers Turns All Layers off. Enter the layers where the entities you want to
import reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
CATIA file with _Ln appended. For example, if the CATIA file name
is test.model and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups will be
named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers, 111 for
additional information.
Main Index
File>Import 129
Importing Models and Results
Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database (simply trimmed or general trimmed).
Solid Representation Solids may appear in boundary representation (B-rep Solids) or as a
collection of constituent surfaces. The Parameterized Solid option
allows B-rep solids, whose faces are biparametric surfaces, to be
automatically converted to triparametric solids.
Enable Tolerance Prompt If OFF (default), global model tolerance is calculated based on the
expected maximum model size (see Global Model Tolerance, 449),
without prompting for a response.
Enable Geometry Tracking If ON, a geometry tracking log file will be created to describe
geometric attributes of imported geometry.
Main Index
130 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 131
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
132 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 133
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences
In this dialog box you can specify your preferences on how to treat surfaces and solids, as well as
tolerances, when importing entities in the Patran database.
Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database (simply trimmed or general trimmed).
Solid Representation Solids may appear in boundary representation (B-rep Solids) or as a
collection of constituent surfaces. The Parameterized Solid option
allows B-rep solids, whose faces are biparametric surfaces, to be
automatically converted to triparametric solids.
Enable Tolerance Prompt If OFF (default), global model tolerance is calculated based on the
expected maximum model size (see Global Model Tolerance, 449),
without prompting for a response.
Enable Geometry Tracking If ON, a geometry tracking log file will be created to describe
geometric attributes of imported geometry.
Import Action
• Import Geometry Executes geometry import.
• Calculate Model Processes the file to help determine the best tolerance for geometry
Tolerance import.
Main Index
134 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Geometry Import Icons Select the block icon to import Pro/ENGINEER geometry. To import
a mesh, see Importing Direct Mesh Meshes from a Pro/ENGINEER
Model, 144.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Pro/ENGINEER Options Activates the Pro/ENGINEER Import Options form that enables you
to select the type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Import to Parasolid If ON, Pro/ENGINEER models are imported in a Parasolid geometry
format.
File Type Select the type of Pro/ENGINEER file you are importing.
Main Index
File>Import 135
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Main Index
136 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
Main Index
File>Import 137
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
138 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences Activates a dialog box in which you can specify how certain geometric
entities will be represented in the Patran database.
Entity Types Identifies the classes of geometric entities from which you can select.
Material Import details:
Two values will be extracted from each part (if a material reference is
available):
Main Index
File>Import 139
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
140 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 141
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
142 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Surface Types: Lists the kinds of surfaces available for selection if the Entity Type
you picked is Solid or Surface.
Model Access Options These options are coupled with the File Type selection (in the Import
dialog box), to determine whether an intermediate file (.geo) will be
created and saved, and whether or not the Pro/ENGINEER database
will be loaded directly into the Patran database.
Save Geometry File (.geo)--create an intermediate (.geo) file
Load Database-- import data into Patran
Create Groups from Parts--if ON, a group will be created for:
• each part in an assembly
• each part that is not a component of an assembly
• each .geo file created from an assembly--one group is created for
each component part
• each .geo file created from a single part--one group is created for
the part.
Surface Types Lists the kinds of surfaces available for selection if the Entity Type
you picked is Solid or Surface.
Model Access Options These options are coupled with the File Type selection (in the Import
dialog box), to determine whether an intermediate file (.geo) will be
created and saved, and whether or not the Pro/ENGINEER database
will be loaded directly into the Patran database.
• Save Geometry File (.geo)--create an intermediate (.geo) file
• Load Database-- import data into Patran
• Create Groups from Parts--if ON, a group will be created for:
• each part in an assembly
• each part that is not a component of an assembly
• each .geo file created from an assembly--one group is created
for each component part
• each .geo file created from a single part--one group is created
for the part.
Main Index
File>Import 143
Importing Models and Results
The format of this file is used only by Patran ProENGINEER and it is not compatible with any other
Patran product or process.
• run Pro/ENGINEER
• create the intermediate .geo file
• load the geometry into the Patran database
• delete the .geo file.
Part Save Geometry File Apply these two selections together to:
(.geo)
• run Pro/ENGINEER
Load Database • create the intermediate .geo file
• load the geometry into the Patran database
• save the .geo file.
Part Save Geometry File Apply these two selections together to:
(.geo)
• run Pro/ENGINEER
• create the intermediate .geo file
• save the .geo file.
• not load the geometry
Primitive Geometry Save Geometry File Apply these two selections together to:
(.geo)
• not run Pro/ENGINEER (the .geo file
Load Database has already been created)
• load the geometry from the .geo file into
Create Groups from
the Patran database
Parts
• if an Assembly, create groups from parts
• save the .geo file.
Main Index
144 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Geometry Import Icons Selecting the mesh icon runs Direct Mesh on a Pro/ENGINEER model
to create and import a mesh.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Direct Mesh Options Brings up the Direct Mesh Options form that enables you to select the
type and topology of the mesh.
Main Index
File>Import 145
Importing Models and Results
Mesh Type Specifies the type of mesh that Direct Mesh creates; Tri, Tet, or Tri and
Tet.
Element Size Specifies the element size either by instructing Patran to calculate the
element size or by defining the Maximum/Minimum element size. If
you define a Maximum, the minimum will be calculated as 10% of the
maximum. This value may be overridden.
Element Topology Defines the topology of the elements created during the meshing
process.
Mesh Offsets Enables you to define offset values if multiple meshes are being
imported.
Main Index
146 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Unigraphics uses Parasolid to define geometry, however, Parasolid is also part of the geometric kernel
of Patran. Consequently, there is no need for translation when Unigraphics files are transmitted into
Patran.
This is reflected in the File>Import menu that provides two different transfer methods for Unigraphics
files. The default import method is Direct Parasolid, where you select a Unigraphics part, Unigraphics
creates a Parasolid transmit file (with the extension .xmt_txt), and that file is imported. The second
method of import is Express Translation, where you select a Unigraphics part and an Express Neutral
file is created for import.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If a non-existent group name is entered, a new group with this
name will be created and made current.
Unigraphics Options Activates the Unigraphics Import Options form that enables you to
select the type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Import Format • Parasolid--Unigraphics creates a parasolid transmit file (with the
extension .xmt_txt), then that file is imported into the Patran
database.
• Express File --an express neutral file is created and imported.
Main Index
File>Import 147
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
148 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Entity Layers
• All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
• Layer Numbers Turn All Layers OFF and enter the layers on which the entities reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Attribute Import Displays the Attribute Import dialog box with options for importing
Unigraphics attributes.
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
Unigraphics file with _Ln appended. For example, if the Unigraphics
file name is test.prt and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups
will be named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers,
111 for additional information.
Assembly Import If Preview Components is ON, a dialog box will display the names
of the components in a Unigraphics assembly model. This list can be
used to selectively import assembly components.
Sew Sheet Bodies
Unigraphics Sew If Unigraphics Sew is ON, Unigraphics Sheet Bodies will be modified
on import to enable Unigraphics Sewing software to equivalence or
sew together adjacent edges of the sheets. This is to avoid “cracks”
along adjacent surface edges.
Verify Boundary The Verify Boundary command is similar to the
Verify/Surface/Boundary command in Patran.
Main Index
File>Import 149
Importing Models and Results
Equivalence Edge Vertices If this toggle is ON, topological vertices will be equivalenced during
import.
Save Transmit File If this toggle is ON, the parasolid transmit file will be saved when a
Unigraphics part file is imported. This file will be assigned a .xmt_txt
file name extension.
Attribute Import
The attribute import form is used to filter the attributes that will be imported into Patran.
Preview Attributes
You can inspect the entities and their attributes contained in a Unigraphics part targeted for import and
decide if any entities should be excluded from the import process.
Preview Components
You can inspect the component parts contained in a Unigraphics assembly targeted for import, in order
to selectively include parts in the import process.
Main Index
150 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 151
Importing Models and Results
Show Ug Groups... Display all groups defined for imported Unigraphics entities.
Delete Ug Groups... Delete groups defined for imported Unigraphics entities.
Main Index
152 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 153
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences Activates a dialog box in which you can specify how certain geometric
entities will be represented in the Patran database.
Entity Types Identifies the types of geometric entities from which you can select.
Entity Layers • All--selects all entities regardless of layer assignments
• Work Layer--selects entities from the currently active layer
• Layer numbers--enter layer(s) where the imported entities reside
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
Unigraphics file with _Ln appended. For example, if the Unigraphics
file name is test.prt and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups
will be named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers,
111 for additional information.
Main Index
154 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 155
Importing Models and Results
File Name The name of the Parasolid transmit file to import. In order to avoid
the transmit file from being deleted after import, do not use “-ps0001”
as part of the file name. For example, test-ps0001.x_t will be deleted
after it is imported. (-ps0001 is a string concatenated onto the input
file name for internal purposes.)
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
Parasolid xmt Options Activates the Parasolid xmt Import Options form that enables you to
select the type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
156 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 157
Importing Models and Results
Import Geometry The default, Import Geometry will import the geometry after the
Apply button is selected on the import form. The secondary toggle,
Import Preview will run the translator and provide a summary of
geometry and layer information without importing the geometry.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Entity Layers
• All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
• Layer Numbers Turn All Layers OFF and enter the layers on which the entities reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
Main Index
158 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
Parasolid file with _Ln appended. For example, if the Parasolid file
name is test.x_t and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups will
be named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers, 111
for additional information.
Sew Sheet Bodies
• Patran Sew If Patran Sew is ON, Unigraphics Sheet Bodies will be equivalenced
or sewn together using Patran Sewing software.
• Verify Boundary The Verify Boundary command is similar to the
Verify/Surface/Boundary command in Patran.
Equivalence Edge Vertices If this toggle is ON, topological vertices will be equivalenced during
import.
Main Index
File>Import 159
Importing Models and Results
CAD geometry is first exported in “sat” format. Next, Patran creates a Parasolid transmit (.xmt_txt)
file from that, finally the transmit file is imported through the Parasolid import function.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
ACIS Options Activates the ACIS Import Options form that enables you to select the
type and attributes of entities targeted for import.
See the current Patran Release Guide for currently supported version of the ACIS® Geometric Modeler
and Parasolid®. A summary of features and limitations follows.
Main Index
160 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 161
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
162 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Import Geometry The default, Import Geometry will import the geometry after the
Apply button is selected on the import form. The secondary toggle,
Import Preview will run the translator and provide a summary of
geometry and layer information without importing the geometry.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
Group Classification Displays a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
Main Index
File>Import 163
Importing Models and Results
Create Groups from Layers Select the “Create Groups from Layers” button. A sub-menu appears.
If the “Create Groups from Layers” toggle is ON (Default), a Patran
Group is created for each Layer and all geometry on a layer is added
to a Patran Group. The group name(s) will be defined by the “Group
Name Prefix” provided by the user or if the user did not provide a
“Group Name Prefix” the group name(s) will be the prefix of the
ACIS file with _Ln appended. For example, if the ACIS file name is
test.sat and there are two layers 1,2, then the two groups will be
named: test_L1 and test_L2. See Create Groups from Layers, 111 for
additional information.
Sew Sheet Bodies
• Patran Sew If Patran Sew is ON, Sheet Bodies will be equivalenced or sewn
together using Patran Sewing software.
• Verify Boundary The Verify Boundary command is similar to the
Verify/Surface/Boundary command in Patran.
Parasolid Healing Healing routines of Parasolid are used if this is selected.
Equivalence Edge Vertices If this toggle is ON, topological vertices will be equivalenced during
import.
Save Transmit File If this toggle is ON, the parasolid transmit file will be saved when the
ACIS file is imported. This file will be assigned an .xmt_txt file name
extension.
Main Index
164 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 165
Importing Models and Results
Benefits
The ability to design, simulate and collaborate on a product model in an extended enterprise of many
companies and engineering disciplines requires a standard for describing both geometry data (AP203,
AP209, ???and AP214???). The STEP standards supported by Patran provide the following extended
import/export/archiving benefits:
• Support for Solids (B-rep) export. Previously, only IGES export of geometry was available,
which does not support solids
• Support for SDRC geometry import (including solids) via STEP. Previously, only IGES import
of geometry was available.
• Provides a standard-based mechanism to exchange CAD/CAE data between engineering
companies with different CAD/CAE processes/tools.
• Provides a standard for long term CAD/CAE data archiving.
• Provides for the import/export of CAD generated configuration management and product
structure information (STEP defined minimum subset) associated with the geometry imported
into Patran. Additionally, AP209 provides for analysis version control, which is fully associated
with design version control.
Main Index
166 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Licensing
STEP AP203 requires an Patran STEP AP203 Access license. STEP AP209 requires an Patran STEP
AP209 Access license. STEP AP214 requires an Patran STEP AP214 Access license. For more
information, contact your MSC.Software account representative.
Main Index
File>Import 167
Importing Models and Results
In the Import dialog box, select STEP as the source of the imported database.
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
STEP Options Brings up the STEP AP203/AP214 or AP209 Import Options form
that enables you to select the type and attributes of entities targeted for
import. Note that the same form is used to specify either STEP AP203
or AP214 options but that a different form is used to specify AP209
options.
Import to Parasolid Converts STEP geometry into Parasolid geometry format.
File Type Specifies the type of the imported input file. This may be a STEP 203
or 214 file or a STEP 209 file.
Main Index
168 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
export. However, no user interface is provided to view this data and review its content or associativity to
the imported geometry entities. Prototypes of this functionality are being tested.
Important: STEP composite surface entity has no suitable entity in Patran, so it is not supported.
STEP currently does not support Patran Composite Trimmed Surfaces.
Not all AP203 and AP209 data model entities are supported. The following sections define the scope of
both AP data schemas’ coverage provided in this release.
Main Index
File>Import 169
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
170 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 171
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
172 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
File>Import 173
Importing Models and Results
Currently, AP209 support is for the MD Nastran Preference only. Specific coverage provided in this
release is listed below.
Entities Features
Geometry Geometry data comprising Curves, Surfaces and Solids are exported,
imported, from geometrically bounded surface shape representations
and/or advanced-Brep shape representations. Assemblies are also
supported. Association of Geometry data to Configuration Management
data is maintained when exported. AP209 translation supports all of the
AP203 geometry types.
Configuration Control Support for Configuration Management data conforming to agreed upon
Data STEP minimum subset.
FEM/FEA Data Nodes Support for import and export of nodes in the global coordinate system.
Elements Support for the following Element types:
Volume Elements:
Hexahedral elements:
HEX8, HEX9, HEX20, HEX21, HEX26, HEX27, HEX32&HEX64
Pentahedral elements:
WEDGE6, WEDGE15 & WEDGE24
Tetrahedral elements:
TET4,TET10&TET16
Surface Elements:
Quadrilateral elements:
QUAD4,QUAD5,QUAD8, QUAD9,QUAD12&QUAD16
Triangular elements:
TRI3,TRI4,TRI6&TRI9
Curve Elements:
BAR2,BAR3&BAR4
Materials Support for Isotropic, Orthotropic and Anisotropic Materials with linear
constituent model.
Main Index
174 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Entities Features
Regions Support for the element properties:
Surface Elements:
Membrane Stiffness, Bending Stiffness, Coupling Stiffness, Shear
Stiffness and Thickness.
Curve Elements:
Cross sectional area, Second Moment of Inertia, Torsional and Warping
Constant and Non-structural Mass.
LBCs: Associated with at least one Load Case are only exported.
Load Cases Load Cases which have at least one of the supported LBCs are exported.
Output Requests Support for Multiple Jobs.
Support is available for only those Load Cases associated with a single
result Subcase.
Main Index
File>Import 175
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Geometry Preference Identifies the surface type (solid or trimmed surface) to be created
during the import operation.
Main Index
176 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
• Solid Type Specifies how solids will be represented in the database -- either as B-
rep or Parameterized Solids. The default is B-rep Solid. If you change
to Parameterized Solid, all 5 or 6 sided B-rep solids will be converted
into parameterized solids during import.
• Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database. The default is general trimmed. You can
change the trimmed surface type to simply trimmed.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Model Units
Sew Sheet Bodies
• Patran Sew Instructs Patran to sew together sheet bodies using Patran Sewing
software.
• Verify Boundary The Verify Boundary command is similar to the
Verify/Surface/Boundary command in Patran.
Equivalence Edge Vertices If this toggle is ON, topological vertices will be equivalenced during
import.
Save Transmit File If this toggle is ON, the parasolid transmit file will be saved when a
STEP file is imported. This file will be assigned a .xmt_txt file name
extension.
Load CC1 Data If ON, loads Configuration Control Data (Class 1).
Main Index
File>Import 177
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
Main Index
178 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Layer Numbers Turns All Layers off. Enter the layers where the entities you want to
import reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Load CCI Data If ON, loads Configuration Control Data (Class 1).
Scale Factor Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, millimeters or custom
value units.
Sew Sheet Bodies Instructs Patran to sew together sheet bodies using Patran software.
Load CCI Data If ON, loads Configuration Control Data (Class 1).
Main Index
File>Import 179
Importing Models and Results
Import Preferences Activates a dialog box in which you can specify how certain geometric
entities will be represented in the Patran database.
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
All Layers If ON, all entities are import candidates, regardless of layer
assignment.
Main Index
180 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Layer Numbers Turns All Layers off. Enter the layers where the entities you want to
import reside.
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Imported Data Use this pull-down list to select the types of data you wish to import.
Main Index
File>Import 181
Importing Models and Results
Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database (simply trimmed or general trimmed).
Solid Representation Solids may appear in boundary representation (B-rep Solids) or as a
collection of constituent surfaces. The Parameterized Solid option
allows B-rep solids, whose faces are biparametric surfaces, to be
automatically converted to triparametric solids.
Enable Tolerance Prompt If OFF (default), global model tolerance is calculated based on the
expected maximum model size (see Global Model Tolerance, 449),
without prompting for a response.
Enable Geometry Tracking If ON, a geometry tracking log file will be created to describe
geometric attributes of imported geometry.
Main Index
182 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Import Action
• Import Geometry Executes geometry import.
• Calculate Model Processes the file to help determine the best tolerance for geometry
Tolerance import.
Main Index
File>Import 183
Importing Models and Results
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
STL Options Brings up the STL Import Options form that enables you to specify the
types and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
184 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Define Offsets... Select this button if the likelihood of entity ID duplication exists (e.g.,
when several neutral files are imported). It will activate the Entity
Label Offset Definition form in which you can specify offsets to
avoid conflicting IDs.
Main Index
File>Import 185
Importing Models and Results
Assigning Offsets
Same for all entity types:
• click on Offset, type the offset in the Input Offset Value data, press Enter, or
• pick Automatic Offset to let the system assign offset automatically.
Main Index
186 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Current Group Displays the current group into which the imported entities will be
placed. If you enter a group name that does not yet exist, a new group
with this name will be created and made current.
VDA Options Brings up the VDA Import Options form that enables you to specify
the types and attributes of entities targeted for import.
Main Index
File>Import 187
Importing Models and Results
Entity Types Identifies the type of geometric entities from which you can select.
Trimmed Surface Type Specifies how four-edged faces of trimmed surfaces will be
represented in the database (default is general trimmed, optionally you
can change to simply trimmed).
Group Classification... Brings up a dialog box in which you specify group assignments for
imported entities.
Main Index
188 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Model Units Brings up a dialog box in which you can override the model units
during import. The settings now include: inches, meters, millimeters
or custom value units.
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry
preference value for "Geometry Scale Factor" which is 39.370079
(Inches).
Model Units
Parasolid assumes model units in meters, and has an overall model size limit of a 1000 meter cube. In the
Model Units form you can override the default units in the transmit file to either inches, millimeters, or
Main Index
File>Import 189
Importing Models and Results
a custom unit. If a custom value is desired, a scale factor entered into the databox will be used to calculate
the appropriate unit value.
The default Model Unit Override value is the Patran Preference value for “Geometry Scale factor for:
• “Import to Parasolid”
CATIA
Pro/ENGINEER
STEP AP203
• ACIS
• VDA
The default model units override value is the Patran geometry preference value for "Geometry Scale
Factor" which is 39.370079 (Inches).
If a different default value is desired when opening a new Patran database, create a new template database
by opening the default template database delivered by Patran, change the Geometry Scale Factor to the
desired value, then save as the new template database.
Then when opening a new database to import geometry into from a CAD System, it will use this value
as the default model units for the imported geometry.
Main Index
190 File>Import
Importing Models and Results
Importing Results
The File>Import command can also bring in results data created outside of the current database. If the
imported object is specified as Results, the Import dialog box buttons and text boxes are related to result
import choices. Imported result files may be in a variety of Patran formats.
Main Index
File>Import 191
Importing Models and Results
Main Index
192 File>Export
Exporting Files
With the File>Export command sequence you can transfer model data to use outside the current
database. Exported output may be in the form of Patran neutral files, or formatted as ACIS, Parasolid
xmt, CATIA V4, IGES, STEP, or VDA files.
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .out.
Format The output file may be a PATRAN 2.5 neutral file, IGES format,
Parasolid xmt file, or STEP file.
Neutral Options Activates the Neutral Export Options dialog box in which you select
exported entities and groups.
Main Index
File>Export 193
Exporting Files
Neutral File Title Activates the Neutral File Title form to enter a title for your file.
Main Index
194 File>Export
Exporting Files
Entity Packets Displays the names of all entity types that are candidates for export.
Select the packet(s) to send to the output file.
Existing Groups Select the groups to transmit to the output file. Only those entities that
belong to a group will be exported, therefore this is a required
selection.
Main Index
File>Export 195
Exporting Files
ACIS Options Brings up the ACIS Export Options form that enables you to select the
type of entities targeted for export.
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .sat.
Format Select ACIS to create an output file.
ACIS Version
• The resulting ACIS file is ACIS version 13.0.
Scaling Factor
• The scaling factor used during the translation is 1000. ACIS assumes this underlying unit to be
millimeters and Parasolid units are meters, therefore, 1000 indicates the number of millimeters
(the default unit) represented by each unit in the save file data.
Main Index
196 File>Export
Exporting Files
Entity Types Displays the names of all entity types that are candidates for export.
Select the packet(s) to send to the output file.
Main Index
File>Export 197
Exporting Files
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .xmt.
Format Select Parasolid xmt to create an output file.
Parasolid xmt Options Activates the Parasolid xmt Options dialog box in which you select
exported entities and groups.
Main Index
198 File>Export
Exporting Files
Entity Types Displays the names of all entity types that are candidates for export.
Select the packet(s) to send to the output file.
Parasolid Version for Select the version for export.
Export
Main Index
File>Export 199
Exporting Files
CATIA V4 Options Brings up the CATIA V4 Export Options form that enables you to
select the type of entities targeted for export.
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .model.
Format Select CATIA V4 to create an output file.
CATIA Version
• The resulting .model file is CATIA version 4.1.9
Main Index
200 File>Export
Exporting Files
The following table shows attribute transfer from Parasolid to CATIA V4:
Main Index
File>Export 201
Exporting Files
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .igs. For
multiple files, version numbers will be appended to the file name.
Format Select IGES to create an output file in IGES format.
IGES Options Activates the IGES Export Options dialog box in which you define
the IGES file sections and select exported entities and groups.
Main Index
202 File>Export
Exporting Files
Main Index
File>Export 203
Exporting Files
Main Index
204 File>Export
Exporting Files
Main Index
File>Export 205
Exporting Files
Entity Groups Select the groups to transmit to the output file. Only those entities that
belong to a group will be exported, therefore this is a required
selection.
IGES Point Type Specify what IGES point type will be created from Patran points.
Main Index
206 File>Export
Exporting Files
Main Index
File>Export 207
Exporting Files
STEP 203/209/214 Options Brings up the STEP 203/209/214 Export Options form that enables
you to select the type and attributes of entities targeted for export.
Export Through Parasolid Uses Parasolid format as the starting format for exporting the
File Type geometry. STEP 203 and STEP 214 files can be created when this
toggle is ON.
File Type Select STEP AP203/209/214 to create a STEP AP203/209/214
output file.
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .st.
Format Select STEP to create an output file.
Main Index
208 File>Export
Exporting Files
Currently, AP209 support is for the MD Nastran Preference only. Specific coverage provided in this
release is listed below.
Entities Features
Geometry Geometry data comprising Curves, Surfaces and Solids are exported,
imported, from geometrically bounded surface shape representations
and/or advanced-Brep shape representations. Assemblies are also
supported. Association of Geometry data to Configuration Management
data is maintained when exported. AP209 translation supports all of the
AP203 geometry types.
Configuration Control Support for Configuration Management data conforming to agreed upon
Data STEP minimum subset.
FEM/FEA Data Nodes Support for import and export of nodes in the global coordinate system.
Elements Support for the following Element types:
Volume Elements:
Hexahedral elements:
HEX8, HEX9, HEX20, HEX21, HEX26, HEX27, HEX32&HEX64
Pentahedral elements:
WEDGE6, WEDGE15 & WEDGE24
Tetrahedral elements:
TET4,TET10&TET16
Surface Elements:
Quadrilateral elements:
QUAD4,QUAD5,QUAD8, QUAD9,QUAD12&QUAD16
Triangular elements:
TRI3,TRI4,TRI6&TRI9
Curve Elements:
BAR2,BAR3&BAR4
Materials Support for Isotropic, Orthotropic and Anisotropic Materials with linear
constituent model.
Main Index
File>Export 209
Exporting Files
Entities Features
Regions Support for the element properties:
Surface Elements:
Membrane Stiffness, Bending Stiffness, Coupling Stiffness, Shear
Stiffness and Thickness.
Curve Elements:
Cross sectional area, Second Moment of Inertia, Torsional and Warping
Constant and Non-structural Mass.
LBCs: Associated with at least one Load Case are only exported.
Load Cases Load Cases which have at least one of the supported LBCs are exported.
Output Requests Support for Multiple Jobs.
Support is available for only those Load Cases associated with a single
result Subcase.
Main Index
210 File>Export
Exporting Files
The following table shows attribute transfer from Parasolid to STEP AP214:
Entity Types Displays the names of all entity types that are candidates for export.
Select the packet(s) to send to the output file.
Main Index
File>Export 211
Exporting Files
VDA Options Brings up the VDA Export Options form that enables you to select the
type of entities targeted for export.
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The default file name extension is .vda.
Format Select VDA to create an output file.
VDA Version
• The resulting .model file is VDA version 2.0.
Main Index
212 File>Export
Exporting Files
Entity Types Displays the names of all entity types that are candidates for export.
Select the packet(s) to send to the output file.
Main Index
File>SimXpert 213
Session Files
SimXpert This menu item appears if you have a valid installation of SimXpert on your local
system and the environment variable MSC_SX_HOME is set pointing to the
installation directory of SimXpert. Selecting this option will launch SimXpert. If
you wish to export a current model to SimXpert, this can be done in the Analysis
application with the Action/Object/Method set to Analyze/Entire Model/Load
SimXpert in the MSC or MD Nastran preference.
Main Index
214 File>SimManager
Session Files
SimManager Publishes and retrieves Patran databases and other related analysis files directly
from within Patran with the SimManager client. Once logged on, the user may
publish, retrieve, and browse as well view connection properties and access the
Web Client. The server connection properties and settings need to be set in order
for the SimManager client to communicate with the server. The following
variables need to be set.:
SM_RICH_CLIENT_CONFIG_FILE
SM_RICH_CLIENT_IC_HOST
SM_RICH_CLIENT_IC_PORT
SM_RICH_CLIENT_IC_PROTOCOL http
SM_RICH_CLIENT_IC_WEBCONTEXT SimManager_R3
SM_RICH_CLIENT_ROOT
For more information on this, please see the Patran Environment Variables (p. 48)
in the Patran Installation and Operations Guide or the SimManager
documentation for more details. Client access to a SimManager server via Patran
is only supported on Windows machines.
Main Index
File>Session 215
Session Files
A session file is a log of all database related commands and corresponding comments executed during a
work session. A single session file may contain commands that were used for more than one database.
The File>Session>Play command sequence executes a specified session file either in its entirety or one
command at a time for debugging or editing purposes.
File Name/Type Select or type a file name. Session files are given a.ses.xx filename
extension, where xx is a number that shows where this session file is
in the sequential order of session files.
Single Step Plays back the session file one line at a time.
Commit Commands Commits (saves) the database before each command is executed. This
prevents an Undo from canceling an entire session file.
Stop Stops playing the session file. After stopping, this button changes to
Resume. Press Resume to continue playing the session file.
Main Index
216 File>Session
Session Files
File Name/Type Enter a new file name. The extension .ses will be added
automatically.
Record Rotations Records each incremental rotation of your model in the session and
journal files.
Stop Stops recording the session file. After stopping, this button changes to
Resume. Press Resume to continue recording the session file.
Main Index
File>Print 217
Printing Patran Images
The File>Print command sequence will send Patran images to a designated printer or to a specified print
file. Print setups and properties are unique to the operating system and to each printer, but several Patran
options exist that allow you certain control over the printed output.
Main Index
218 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Printing on Windows
Print From Select Viewport(s) and/or XY Window(s) to print. You can print one
or several viewports and windows on the same page. Invalid options
are disabled (e.g., if there are no XY Windows posted, the Current XY
Window option will be disabled).
One Viewport per page If this toggle is ON, only a single viewport will be printed on a page.
Print to File Toggle this ON if you do not wish to print immediately but want to
save the output to a file for later use. The following form will be
superimposed on the Print dialog box, listing the available print file
options.
Main Index
File>Print 219
Printing Patran Images
Postscript Files
Although different Postscript printers can have different setups and defaults, the Postscript Driver
generally supports the options listed below. Defaults are shown in bold. If desired, defaults may be
overridden in the Printer Configuration File, p3_printers.def.
Main Index
220 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Print 221
Printing Patran Images
Color EPS files will separate into the four process colors (CMYK) provided that the application can
produce separations. Non-color EPS files will separate onto the process black plate. There are no line
screen directives in the EPS file. Color EPS files placed in a document and sent to a non-color printer
will print in grayscale.
Main Index
222 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Printing on UNIX
For running Patran in a UNIX environment, use the Print form to generate output of your Patran images.
Select the Viewport(s) and/or XY Window(s) to print. You can print multiple viewports
and windows on the same page or on separate pages. Invalid options are disabled
(e.g., Current XY Window is disabled if there are no XY Windows posted).
Current Viewport
Select the Current Printer. The list of
Available Printers is defined by the Printer
Configuration File, 236. This file can be
Available Printers system wide but is usually user specific. You
Postscript Default can set a default printer specifying the
Patran environment variable primary_printer
PatranHard Default in the settings.pcl file. Example:
CGM Default pref_env_set_string (“primary _printer”,
HPGL Default “printer_name”), where printer_name
HPGL2 Default corresponds to the right hand side of the
Patran Hard to Postcript Default Printer variable defined by the Printer
Configuration File, 236.
Apply Cancel
More Help:
(Available Printers)
• Postscript Options, 223
Will generate an output file and either
spool it to the printer or save it in the • PatranHard File Options, 227
current directory.
• CGM Options, 228
• HP-GL Options, 231
• HP-GL/2 Options, 234
Main Index
File>Print 223
Printing Patran Images
Page Setup
The Page Setup subform defines the paper size, margins, print orientation and number of copies to print.
The defaults on the form are a function of the Current Printer. This form reverts to the printer’s default
settings every time the printer is selected from the listbox on the Print form.
Print Control
Choices change with the current
printer. For possible paper sizes
Paper Size Letter see the Printer Configuration File,
236.
Margins
Left 0.5 Right 0.5
Margins can be specified in the
Top 0.5 Bottom 0.5 following units: inches, cm, mm,
picas and points. If no units are
specified, inches are assumed.
Default Units Inches The default margins are a function
of the current printer.
Print Orientation
OK Cancel
Postscript Options
The Options subform defines Driver specific options. Shown below is a typical setting for a PostScript
laser printer. The options and defaults are unique to the current printer. They are defined in the Printer
Main Index
224 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Configuration File, 236. The form reverts to the printer’s default settings every time the printer is selected
from the listbox on the Print form.
Determines if the image is printed in color or black and white. In the latter case,
the spectrum colors can be optionally converted to a “black to white” or “white to
black” range.
Print Control
You can control the color of the
Background and the Lines & Text
Format Black to White independently of the Format.
Valid options are White, Black
and Actual.
Background White
Correlates the one pixel line width
Lines & Text Black on the screen to a line width on
output. Valid units are inches, cm,
mm, picas and points. Note that
Line Weight 0.25 pts there are 6 picas per inch and
72 points per inch.
Text Scale 250%
You can scale the text
Image Size Fit on Page independently of the image. Enter
a percentage. Text can be
Draw Borders Yes deleted from the output by
entering “None” in this databox.
Main Index
File>Print 225
Printing Patran Images
The Postscript Driver supports the following options. The default choice is shown in bold. Note that this
default can be overridden in the Printer Configuration File, 236.
Main Index
226 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Print 227
Printing Patran Images
Print Control
Format Color
You can control the color of the
Image resolution (dots per inch). Background and the Lines &
Background White Text independently of the
Format. Valid options are White,
Black and Actual.
Lines & Text Actual
Filename patran.hrd
OK Cancel
Main Index
228 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
CGM Options
Determines if the image is printed in color or black and white. In the latter case, the
spectrum colors can be optionally converted to a “black to white” or “white to black”
range.
Print Control
More Help:
OK Cancel (Available Printers)
• Postscript Options, 223
• PatranHard File Options, 227
“Fit on Page” scales the image so that it fits on the
Paper Size defined on the Page Setup form (less • HP-GL Options, 231
margins). Or the image can be left unscaled • HP-GL/2 Options, 234
(same as the size on the screen) with the As Is
option.
Main Index
File>Print 229
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
230 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Print 231
Printing Patran Images
HP-GL Options
Determines if the image is printed in color or black and white. In the latter case, the
spectrum colors can be optionally converted to a “black to white” or “white to black”
range.
Print Control
Main Index
232 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Print 233
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
234 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
HP-GL/2 Options
Determines if the image is printed in color or black and white. In the latter
case, the spectrum colors can be optionally converted to a “black to white” or
“white to black” range.
Main Index
File>Print 235
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
236 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Print 237
Printing Patran Images
The printer is named Engineering. It appears with this name in the Available Printers listbox in the Print
form. The Destination is lw9. The only Paper Size assigned is Letter. The default margins are 0.5 inch.
The output will be generated in a “Black to White” Format with a White Background. Lines & Text will
be Black. Note that these last three options will not appear on the form. The default Line Weight is 0.5 pts
and the default Text Scale is 100%. Two Image Size options (Fit on Page and As Is) will be available.
Borders will always be drawn. The remaining options will be assigned the system default values.
Rules for defining a printer are as follows:
1. Each Printer must have a unique name (duplicate printers are ignored). This option must be first.
The remaining options can be defined in any order.
2. Each printer must be assigned a valid Driver. Printers with invalid drivers are ignored.
3. The syntax to use is “Option = ( Choice 1, Choice 2; Default )”. Options are to be separated by
commas. Undefined options are ignored.
4. Choices must be contained within parentheses and be separated by commas. An optional default
can be declared at the end separated from the choices by a semicolon. Undefined choices are
ignored.
5. If the first choice is “No Show”, then this option will not appear on the form. Its value can be
preset with a default; otherwise, the system default will be used. This feature only applies to
Driver Specific options. The Printer Definition and Page Setup options are always displayed. If
all Driver Specific options are hidden, then the Options button on the main form will be disabled
(for the subject printer only).
6. The @ sign continues the printer definition on the next line.
7. Options not assigned will be given the system default.
The following table lists each option and its possible choices. The first section refers to the Printer
Definition options and the second to the Page Setup options. These are used by all drivers. Following this
Main Index
238 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
are Driver Specific options. System defaults for unspecified choices are shown in bold. Those options
that accommodate multiple choices (Option menu instead of a Databox) are also shown in bold.
Main Index
File>Print 239
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
240 File>Print
Printing Patran Images
Main Index
File>Images 241
Create Graphic Images
Images are graphic outputs of Patran models generated in a number of popular graphics file formats that
can be accessed on various computer platforms. Image files utilize specific compression techniques.
Outputs may be static images, animations, or 3D virtual models. The supported standard Internet
graphics formats are BMP, JPEG, MPEG, PNG, TIFF and VRML.
The playback of generated images is highly dependent on the hardware and software used for viewing.
Limitations, such as window size, color maps, file size, and the number of animation frames can affect
the quality of the display.
When you select File>Images, the Output dialog box allows you to pick the output format type.
Main Index
242 File>Images
Create Graphic Images
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder and file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .bmp extension.
Optionally, you can supply a new file name complete with the
extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing bitmap file name, the new image will
overwrite the image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing bitmap file name, the new image will be
added to the image that is currently in the file.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
File>Images 243
Create Graphic Images
However, with the Quality slide bar in the dialog box, you do have some control over the image
compression. If you set Quality to a higher value, the image file will be larger but the final appearance
of the image will be closer to the original.
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder or file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .jpg extension.
You can enter a new name but keep the .jpg extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing file name, the new image will overwrite the
image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing file name, the new image will be added to
the image that is currently in the file.
Quality Sets the relative quality of the image output. A value of 1.0 is the
highest quality (least compressed, largest file), and a value of 0
produces the lowest quality (most compressed, smallest file) output.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
244 File>Images
Create Graphic Images
record complex animation sequences, for example animate model translations and rotations, or analysis
results.
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder or file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .mpg extension.
Optionally, you can supply a new file name complete with the
extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing file name, the new image will overwrite the
image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing file name, the new image will be added to
the image that is currently in the file.
Max. Frames Set the maximum number of animation frames generated.
Start (1), Pause (2), and Stop (3) buttons to control animation file
recording.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
File>Images 245
Create Graphic Images
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder or file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .png extension.
Optionally, you can supply a new file name complete with the
extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing file name, the new image will overwrite the
image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing file name, the new image will be added to
the image that is currently in the file.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
246 File>Images
Create Graphic Images
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder or file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .tif extension.
Optionally, you can supply a new file name complete with the
extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing file name, the new image will overwrite the
image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing file name, the new image will be added to
the image that is currently in the file.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
File>Images 247
Create Graphic Images
distributed using the World Wide Web and explored interactively by remote users. The current
specification, VRML 2.0, supports JAVA, sound, animation, and Javascript.
File Select Use this option to navigate to the desired folder or file.
Filename Default name is the current database name with the .wrl extension.
Optionally, you can supply a new file name complete with the
extension.
Overwrite If you selected an existing file name, the new image will overwrite the
image that is currently in the file.
Increment If you selected an existing file name, the new image will be added to
the image that is currently in the file.
Apply Save the image file in the specified destination folder.
Main Index
248 File>Report
Creating Report Files
The File>Report command enables you to write and print a report file that contains a summary of a
model, its node and element attributes, properties and results. You can control the format of the report
with options you select in the Report File Preferences form, and read the completed report file using any
word processor program (e.g. Notepad).
Main Index
File>Report 249
Creating Report Files
Report File Name The name of the report file is automatically entered from the File
Name input field.
Report Contents Select the data you want to include in the report file.
Main Index
250 File>Report
Creating Report Files
Main Index
File>Report 251
Creating Report Files
Main Index
252 File>Report
Creating Report Files
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions 252
The Group Menu 262
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups) 292
Main Index
252 Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions
Group Names
Groups, as well as several other database objects (e.g. viewports), are assigned names to differentiate
them from one another. In naming groups, you must conform to the following set of rules:
• Uniqueness--each name must be unique.
• Number of characters--name may not contain more than 31 characters.
• “Legal” characters--the following characters are acceptable in names:
a through z
A through Z
0 through 9
-, _ , and .
• Case sensitivity--upper and lower case letters are differentiated. For example, group_1 and
Group_1 are regarded as two distinct groups.
• Optional prefixes and suffixes--a prefix and/or suffix added to a stem name can make it easier to
manage named objects. For example:
asm.wheel.left
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups 253
Group Concepts and Definitions
Group Membership
A group may consist of any combination of geometric and finite element entities. Other design features,
such as coordinate frames, materials, element properties, loads and boundary conditions, fields, and
analysis results cannot be categorized as group members even though they are associated with group
members.
Group Status
The status of a group may be:
• current or not current
• posted or unposted
• target group
Current Group
The current group is the active and visible group that receives all newly created entities. Any group may
be selected as current, however only one group may be current at any given time. The name of the current
group is displayed as part of the Viewport Banner.
Each viewport has its own current group but the only active current group is that of the current viewport
(see also Current Viewport, 309).
Posted Group
Posted groups are the groups that are visible in a viewport. A current group is automatically posted, but
any number of additional groups may also be posted to the same viewport. A group may be posted to
more than one viewport.
Posting gives you the power of selectively displaying entities, since only those entities that are contained
in posted groups are visible in a viewport.
You can unpost any posted group but do not unpost the current group, or else you will not be able to see
the geometric and finite element entities as they are created.
Target Group
A group selected for action in certain commands (e.g., Group Translate).
Group Attributes
For each group you may specify a unique color and rendering style (e.g., smooth shaded), and display
entity labels. Although attributes can be assigned to groups in the Group Menu, for attribute definitions
you must look in the Display Menu (see The Display Menu, 369).
Main Index
254 Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions
Transforming Groups
Group transformations allow you to translate, rotate, and otherwise modify the position of a large number
of entities in a single step. Several transformations, e.g., rotation, allow repeated iterations as well.
Deleting Groups
When a group is deleted, or dissolved, its former members remain in the model database unless you
specifically request to delete them.
Note that the current group of a viewport cannot be deleted.
Important: If a deleted group contains nodes associated with elements or multipoint constraints
not in the group, these nodes will be retained in the database even if you choose to
delete the rest of the group members.
Group Transformations
Transformations are rigid body movements that treat a group as a single unit. These operations can
translate, rotate, mirror, scale, pivot, or reorient a large number of entities at the same time.
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups 255
Group Concepts and Definitions
Implicit in a transformation process is the copy action. By default, in a transformation process the original
(target) group is copied and the resulting copy is transformed leaving the target group in its initial
position. As a result, a number of new entities are created while the originals are retained, unless you
specifically request that the original entities be deleted.
The operations of translation, rotation, and scaling allow you to iterate the transformation process by
entering a repeat count (n). In all of these actions, if the repeat count is greater than 1, the copies of the
target group are placed in the current group (new entities are always placed in the current group!).
However, you may choose the current group to be the same as the target group.
In these transformations you can either save the original group members or delete them, optionally
reusing the entity IDs of the deleted entities for the new members. Similarly, you may retain the original
target group or delete it, except when the target group and the current group are the same, in which case
the delete option is not selectable.
Translation
Translation is a linear transformation along an XYZ translation vector. The formula for translation is:
P n Z P n Ó 1 H T xyz
where:
Pn = the location of a point ( P 0 ) in the current group after the nth iteration.
Pn Ó 1 = the location of the same point before the nth iteration.
T xyz = the translation vector.
Rotation
Rotation is an angular transformation around an axis. The formula for rotation is:
Pn Z Pn Ó 1 H ( θo H θr )
Main Index
256 Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions
where:
Pn = the location of a point ( P 0 ) in the current group after the nth iteration.
Pn Ó 1 = the location of the same point before the nth iteration.
θo = an optional offset angle. The offset is valid only for the first rotation, for the second
iteration and beyond, θo Z 0 .
θr = the rotation angle.
P2
P1
Repeat Count = 2
θr
θr
Axis
θo
P0
Radius
The plane of rotation is established by the Axis and the Radius. The axis is a vector that is normal to, and
intersects, the plane of rotation. The radius of rotation, a straight line in the plane of rotation, extends
from the location of point P0 to the point where the axis intersects the plane. See Rotating Points, Curves,
Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 705) in the Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 for
further information on entity rotation.
Scaling
This transformation proportionately scales the target group relative to a scaling origin ( S 0 ). The formula
for scaling is:
P n Z P n Ó 1 ⋅ S xyz
where:
Pn = the location of a point ( P0 ) in the current group, relative to the scaling origin,
after the nth iteration.
Pn Ó 1 = the location of the same point before the nth iteration.
Sxyz = the scaling factors in the X, Y, and Z directions.
Mirroring
Mirror transformation is a 180-degree rigid-body rotation of a group around a mirror plane. The formula
for mirroring is:
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups 257
Group Concepts and Definitions
Pm Z ÓPb
where:
Pm = the distance, before transformation, of any point ( P 0 ) from the final mirror
plane, measured along an axis, normal to the final mirror plane.
Pb = the distance, after transformation, of the same point from the final mirror
plane, measured along an axis, normal to the final mirror plane.
Radius of Rotation--is a straight line of length P b that is normal to the final mirror plane, and extends
from the selected point ( P 0 ) to the point of intersection with the final mirror plane.
In the example illustrated below, the selected mirror plane is the Y-Z plane of the global cartesian
coordinate system. Thus, the offset, radius, and distances P b and Pm are measured along the X-axis,
which is normal to the Y-Z plane.
P’ P
Pm Radius = Pb
X
Offset
Modifying Orientation
This transformation moves a group from its original coordinate frame to a new coordinate frame. The
local position of the group with respect to the new coordinate frame will be the same as its local position
Main Index
258 Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions
with respect to the original coordinate frame. This method provides a simple way to re-orient a group of
entities with respect to existing geometry.
X
X
Z
(1) (2)
Coordinate Frame 0 Coordinate Frame 2
Pivoting
This transformation performs the rigid-body rotation of a group through a plane defined by a pivot point
( Pp ), a starting point ( P s ), and an ending point ( Pe ).
The angle of rotation, θ , is the angle between the P p P s and P p P e vectors. The center of rotation is
the pivot point, Pp .
In the diagram below, any point P a in a group is rotated around point P p through angle θ to produce the
corresponding point, P b in the pivoted group.
Ps
Pa
Radius
θ Pe
θ
Pb
Pp
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups 259
Group Concepts and Definitions
Repositioning
Modifying the position of a group involves simultaneous rigid-body translation and rotation. The
transformation is defined by mapping a set of three points in an original position to a set of three points
in a destination position. The transformation cannot be performed if either set of points lies in a straight
line.
Each three-point set defines a temporary coordinate frame. The positional and angular differences
between the two frames establish a translation vector and planar rotation angles, respectively. These are
then applied to all geometry.
P1o
P2d Vt
P1d
P3d P2o
P3o
(1)
P2d
P1d P3d
P1o P2o
P2d P3o P2o
P3d P2d P3o
P1d P1d
P2o P1o P1o
P3o P3d
Two vectors are drawn; one between the original position points P 1o and P 2o ( P 1o P 2o ) and
Two additional vectors, P 1d P 2d and P 1d P 3d , are drawn between the three destination
position points ( P 1d to P 2d ) and ( P1d to P 3d ).
The two angles, one between P 1o P 2o and P 1d P 2d and the second between P 1o P 3o and
Main Index
260 Patran Reference Manual
Group Concepts and Definitions
Caution: Loads that are normal to surface geometry and to 2D elements are not reversed when
mirror transformation is used, unless you pick the option to do so. These loads
maintain their directionality with respect to the entity’s normal.
Properties
Along with the entities of a group, you may also transform properties assigned to the original group
members with one of the following options:
• Transform--applies the same transformation to properties as the transformation applied to the
group and assigns them to the newly transformed entities. Material orientations, however, are
not transformed.
• The Transform option is the only one that creates new property sets.
• Copy--does not transform properties but adds the same property set to the newly transformed
entities. Therefore, when element properties with directionality, such as material orientation,
beam orientation, and beam offset are copied, their definition may not be correct for the new
entities.
Main Index
Ch. 5: All About Groups 261
Group Concepts and Definitions
Set Names
For each existing LBC set or Property Set referenced by entities in the current group, and for each repeat
count, a new LBC set or Property Set may be created with transformed entities. The names of the new
property sets are derived from the original set name; an extension is appended to the original name in the
form of .N, where "N" is an integer. The value of N is determined by searching all existing property sets
for the highest ".N" extension, and then incrementing it by 1.
Fields referenced by transformed LBC sets or property sets are not modified or extended. For LBC fields,
you must manually extend the field, for all other field types, you must ensure that the field applies in the
space of the newly transformed entities.
Main Index
262 Patran Reference Manual
The Group Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it calls up a dialog box in which you enter further data.
Group
Create...
Post...
Modify...
Move/Copy...
Set Current...
Transform...
Delete...
Attributes...
The Group pulldown menu keywords lead to dialog boxes that initiate all group-related actions. Menu
functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear.
Main Index
Group>Create 263
Creating a New Group
The Group>Create command sequence displays the dialog box below. Assign a unique group name,
observing group naming conventions, then select entities designated for membership in the group.
Main Index
264 Group>Create
Creating a New Group
Additional options include making the new group current, as well as unposting all other groups currently
posted.
Main Index
Group>Create 265
Creating a New Group
Filter Using a filter helps you reduce the number of items displayed in a
potentially long list. Consequently, it takes less time to search for an
item (see Forms, Widgets, and Buttons, 24). By default, all items
contained in a list will be displayed since the default filter is the wild
card (*). To specify a filter, either enter the full name of the desired
item or type one or more letters in the name followed by a wildcard.
After you pressed the Filter button to activate it, only the item(s) that
pass the filter criteria will be included in the list.
Existing Group Names Displays the names of previously defined groups for your information.
The name of the current group is highlighted.
New Group Name Enter a unique new group name; (see Group Names, 252 for more
help).
Make Current Default is ON (4). Makes the new group the current group.
Unpost All Other Groups The new group is posted and any other posted groups are unposted.
Group Contents Provides several options for selecting entities to become group
members. Click the Add Entity Selection button then select entities
to include in the new group. Additional options include adding all
geometric entities, all FEM entities, all orphan entities, or even adding
all entities.
Entity Selection Displays the ID’s of the entities as you select them for inclusion.
To select several entities, hold down the Shift key while picking the
next item.
Changing Actions
To change from one Group command to another, you may return to the Group menu and pick another
keyword, or alternately, click on the Action button in the current dialog box to display all action options,
then select the desired action. As the new action dialog box is opened, the previous one will be closed.
Main Index
266 Group>Post
Posting and Unposting Groups
Main Index
Group>Post 267
Posting and Unposting Groups
The Group>Post dialog box allows you to post or unpost one or more selected groups. Posted groups
are the groups that are visible in a viewport. A current group is automatically posted, but one or more
additional groups may also be posted to the same viewport. A group may be posted (visible) in more than
one viewport.
Current Viewport Identifies the current viewport in which you post the group.
Select Groups to Post Displays the names of all groups in the database. To post a group, click
on its name to highlight it; to unpost, click on a highlighted name to
unhighlight it.
To select several groups listed consecutively, hold the Shift key while
clicking the last item. To select several groups not listed consecutively,
hold the Ctrl key while clicking on each additional member.
Main Index
268 Group>Modify
Modifying Groups
With the Group>Modify command and dialog box you can modify the following group definitions:
• Make a selected (target) group current.
• Rename a selected group.
• Add entities to a group.
Main Index
Group>Modify 269
Modifying Groups
Target Group to Modify Identifies the group targeted for modification. Although the default
target group is the current group, you may designate any another group
as the target group.
Change Target Group Displays a dialog box in which you can select a different target group.
Make Current Makes the target group the current group.
Rename Enables you to enter a new name for the target group in a subordinate
dialog box.
Main Index
270 Group>Modify
Modifying Groups
Selectable Members When this toggle is not turned to ON, the entities that belong to the
group cannot be picked even though the group is displayed (default is
ON (4)).
Member List Lists the member entities of the group by name and ID.
Member List to Displays IDs of the entities as you select them for adding to or
Add/Remove removing from the group.
To add entities, select from the screen or type in entity IDs. To remove
entities, you can pick them from the Member List textbox.
To select several entities, hold the Shift key and click the next item.
Add Press this button to complete the process of adding the selected entities
to the target group.
Remove Press this button to complete the process of removing the listed
members from target group. The membership of these entities in other
groups will not be affected.
Main Index
Group>Modify 271
Modifying Groups
Main Index
272 Group>Modify
Modifying Groups
Renaming a Group
If you pressed the Rename... button in the Group Modify dialog box, you will see the subordinate dialog
box shown below.
Existing Names Displays the names of existing groups. If you select a filter only those
groups that pass the filter criteria will be listed.
Rename As Enter the new name that you want to give to the target group.
Main Index
Group>Move/Copy 273
Moving and Copying Group Members
The Group>Move/Copy command and dialog box allows you to move or copy entities between groups.
From Group Pick the source group to which the entities currently belong.
To Group Pick the destination group to where the entities are moved or copied.
Move Removes selected entities from the source group and places them into
the destination group.
Copy Copies selected entities from the source group into the destination
group.
Select Entities... Displays the Entity Selection form.
Main Index
274 Group>Move/Copy
Moving and Copying Group Members
Select Entities
Geom. Off Press Geom. Off to cancel the “all” selection. Note that an entity type
is selectable only if its toggle box is ON (4).
FEM On Press FEM On to be able to pick all FEM entity types.
FEM Off Press FEM Off to cancel the “all” selection.
From Name of the From Group as selected in the parent form.
“From” textboxes Textboxes display the current members of the From Group.
Copy/Move Displays the IDs of the entities selected for the copy or move
operation (the heading of “Copy" or "Move" is based on the switch
you turned on in the parent form).
To pick entities:
Main Index
Group>Move/Copy 275
Moving and Copying Group Members
Main Index
276 Group>Set Current
Making a Group Current
With the Group>Set Current command you can specify any group as the current group in the current
viewport.
Current Viewport Displays the name of the current viewport (see Current Viewport, 309).
Set Current Group Pick the group you want to designate as the current group.
Main Index
Group>Transform 277
Transforming Groups
The Group>Transform dialog box directs you to various actions that allow you to translate, rotate,
mirror, scale, pivot, reposition, and modify the coordinate frame definition of groups.
Although some of the commands are specific to the transform action you select, certain dialog box entries
are common to all transformations.
Current Group Displays the name of the active and visible current group. All new
entities are automatically associated with this group.
Target Group Identifies the group targeted for the transformation action. The default
target group is the current group, however, you may designate any
another group as the target group.
Change Target Group... Calls up a dialog box in which you can select a target group different
from the current group.
Delete Target Group Generally, in a transformation process the original (target) group is
copied and the resulting copy is transformed leaving the target group
in its initial position. You can, however, request that only the copy(s)
be retained and the target group be deleted, provided that the target
group is not the same as the current group, since the current group
cannot be deleted.
• Use Original IDs Assigns the names and ID numbers of deleted original entities to the
new ones obtained through transformation.
Loads/BCs Loads and boundary conditions associated with transformed entities
may be transformed or copied. Alternately, you may choose not to
assign any loads and boundary conditions to transformed entities.
Properties Properties associated with transformed entities may be transformed or
copied. Alternately, you may choose not to assign any properties to
transformed entities.
Translating Groups
Main Index
278 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
The Group>Transform>Translate command sequence moves and copies a group linearly along an
XYZ translation vector.
Main Index
Group>Transform 279
Translating Groups
Reference Coordinate Specifies the coordinate frame referenced by the translation process.
Frame When you click in this field, the Coordinate Frame select icons will
appear (see Select Menu, 35). Enter the ID of a previously defined
coordinate frame (the ID of the global coordinate frame is Coord 0) or
select a coordinate frame type from the Select Menu then pick a frame
of the selected type in a viewport. The selected reference frame must
be Cartesian; curvilinear frames are not accepted.
Translation Vector When you click in this field, the Vector select icons will appear (see
Select Menu, 35). You may type in the X, Y, Z, components of a vector
or select a vector type from the selection menu then pick a vector of the
selected type in a viewport. Vector direction is reversed if Reverse
Direction is selected. Vector magnitude is calculated automatifically if
Auto Update Magnitude is selected (the default). If Vector Magnitude
is 0 or blank, magnitude is calculated from Direction Vector.
Repeat Count Specifies the number of translated copies you wish to create
(default=1).
Main Index
280 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
Rotating Groups
The Group>Transform>Rotate command sequence performs angular transformations around an axis.
Main Index
Group>Transform 281
Translating Groups
Reference Coordinate Specifies the coordinate frame referenced by the rotation process.
Frame When you click in this field, the Coordinate Frame select icons will
appear in the Toolbar (see Select Menu, 35). Enter the ID of a
previously defined coordinate frame (the ID of the global coordinate
frame is Coord 0) or select a coordinate frame type from the Select
Menu then pick a frame of the selected type in a viewport. The
selected reference frame must be Cartesian; curvilinear frames are not
accepted.
Axis When you click in this field, the Axis select icons will appear in the
Toolbar (see Select Menu, 35). Select the axis type (e.g., 2Point Axis),
then specify an axis of the selected type (e.g., select two points).
Rotation Parameters
• Rotation Angle Specifies the angle of rotation ( θ r ) in degrees. Default = 90o CW. A
minus sign indicates counterclockwise rotation.
• Offset Angle Specifies an angle of offset ( θ o ), if any, in degrees. Default= 0o. A
minus sign indicates a CCW offset angle.
• Repeat Count Specifies the number of rotated copies you wish to create (default=1).
Main Index
282 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
Scaling Groups
The Group>Transform>Scale command sequence proportionately scales the target group relative to a
scaling origin ( S o ).
Main Index
Group>Transform 283
Translating Groups
Reference Coordinate Specifies the coordinate frame referenced by the scaling process.
Frame When you click in this field, the Coordinate Frame select icons will
appear in the Toolbar (see Select Menu, 35). Enter the ID of a
previously defined coordinate frame (the ID of the global coordinate
frame is CoordinateFrame 0) or select a coordinate frame type from
the Select Menu then pick a frame of the selected type in a viewport.
Scale Origin Specifies the coordinate location of the scaling origin. When you click
in this field, the Point select icons will appear in the Toolbar (see
Select Menu, 35). Enter a point location (global Cartesian coordinates,
Point ID, Vertex ID, or Node ID) or select a point type from the Select
Menu (e.g., Curve Intersect) then pick or construct a point of the
selected type in a viewport.
Scale Parameters
Coord. Frame Scale Specifies the scaling factors applied to the group in the X, Y, and Z
Factors directions (if scale factor = 1, there is no change).
Repeat Count Specifies the number of scaled copies you wish to create (default=1).
Main Index
284 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
Mirroring Groups
The Group>Transform>Mirror command sequence performs a 180-degree rigid-body rotation of a
group around a mirror plane.
Main Index
Group>Transform 285
Translating Groups
Define Mirror Plane Specifies the plane that serves as the mirroring plane. When you click
Normal in this field, the Plane select icons will appear in the Toolbar (see
Select Menu, 35). Enter the endpoint coordinates of the axis normal to
the mirror plane or select a plane type from the Select Menu (e.g.,
3Point Plane) then pick a plane of the selected type in a viewport (e.g.,
select three points).
Offset Specifies the offset of the final mirror plane from the one previously
defined. The offset is a specified distance (positive or negative) along
an axis, normal to the selected mirror plane.
Reverse Curves and Modifies the contained curves and surfaces by reversing the
Surfaces corresponding parametric direction and normals. See Reversing a
Curve, 510 and Reversing Surfaces (p. 570) in the Geometry
Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2.
Beam and shell finite elements will also be reversed if this toggle is
on. Solid finite elements will always be reversed (regardless of toggle
setting) to avoid negative volume.
Main Index
286 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
position of the group with respect to a new coordinate frame will be the same as its local position with
respect to the original coordinate frame. Thus the orientation of the group will change.
From Coordinate Frame Specifies the coordinate frame in which the group is currently defined.
The default ID of the From Coordinate Frame is the active coordinate
frame. Coord 0 is the ID of the global coordinate frame.
To Coordinate Frame Specifies the coordinate frame in which a copy of the group will be
created. When you click in this field, the Coordinate Frame select
icons will appear in the Toolbar (see Select Menu, 35). Enter the ID of
a previously defined coordinate frame or select the icon of the
coordinate frame type then pick a frame of the selected type.
Main Index
Group>Transform 287
Translating Groups
Pivoting Groups
The Group>Transform>Pivot command sequence performs rigid-body rotation of a group through a
plane defined by a pivot point ( P p ), a starting point ( Ps ), and an ending point ( P e ).
When you click in one of these fields, the Point select icons will appear in the Toolbar (see Select Menu,
35). Enter a point location (global Cartesian coordinates, Point ID, Vertex ID, or Node ID) or select a
point type from the Select Menu then pick or construct a point of the selected type in a viewport.
Main Index
288 Group>Transform
Translating Groups
Repositioning Groups
The Group>Transform>Position command sequence performs simultaneous rigid-body translation
and rotation of a group. The transformation is defined by mapping a set of three points in an original
position to a set of three points in a destination position.
Original Position Specify the current position of three non-colinear points in the group.
Destination Position Specify the final desired position (non-colinear) of the same three
points in the final group.
When you click in one of these fields, the Point select icons will appear in the Toolbar (see Select Menu,
35). Enter a point location (global Cartesian coordinates, Point ID, Vertex ID, or Node ID) or select a
point type from the Select Menu then pick or construct a point of the selected type in a viewport.
Main Index
Group>Delete 289
Deleting Groups
Main Index
290 Group>Delete
Deleting Groups
Select Group(s) To Delete Highlight the group(s) you want to delete. The current group is never
listed here since it cannot be deleted.
note: If one of the groups listed here is the current group in any other
viewport, it still cannot be deleted until it is no longer a current group
in any viewport.
Delete Associated Members The members of the group you want to delete will be deleted from the
model even if those entities belong to other groups.
Main Index
Group>Attributes 291
Assigning Attributes to Groups
With the Group>Attributes command you can assign named attributes to one or several groups (for
more information on named attributes, see Named Attributes, 367). The advantage of using this command
is that it allows you to assign display attributes to any number of groups.
Main Index
292 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Main Index
Group>Attributes 293
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Unless a hierarchial group structure is created, the group structure is flat. All groups exist at the same
level:
Complex and large FEM data models are diffcult to handle in a flat structure.
Note: By using the right mouse button (RMB) on a selected tree widget entity, a contextual menu
appears giving access to easily change Actions.
Organizing the data hierarchically establishes associations between groups that support performing
operations on more than one group at a time.
H-Group A
Group_1
H-Group B Subgroup
Group_2
H-Group C Subgroup
Group_3
H-Group D
Group_4
H-Group E Subgroup
Group_5
Main Index
294 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Establishing hierarchical groups, subgroups and element parent/child relationships provide a general tool
for subdividing large models. It allows the same operations to be performed on collections of groups, and
groups and their subgroups.
Each hierarchical group can contain only one Patran group.
Hierarchy groups contain pointers to real groups. By selecting parent groups for operations, the
operations can be performed on the elements in the group and subgroups, as well.
You can perform the following actions:
• Create Hgroups. See Creating an Hgroup, 295.
• Post Hgroups. See Posting an Hgroup, 301.
• Modify Hgroups. See Modifying Group Hierarchies, 301.
• Delete Hgroups. See Deleting Hgroups, 303.
• Set Current an Hgroup as the current group. The current group is posted to the current viewport.
See Changing the Current Hgroup, 304.
• Export or Import an entire group hierarchy. See Exporting and Importing Hgroup Trees, 304.
At any time, you can view the existing Hgroups and group hierarchy.
Main Index
Group>Attributes 295
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Creating an Hgroup
Select the action “Create” on the Group Hierarchy form to display the Create Group form.
You use this form to create an association between a standard group and an Hgroup that will contain the
standard group. Assigning the Selection Group name identifies the standard group that is to be
associated with the Hgroup. You can either select a group from the list of groups displayed on the form
or you can enter the name of a standard group. The name you specify can identify an existing standard
group or it can be the name of a standard group that has yet to be created.
You can associate the same standard group with more than one Hgroup, but each Hgroup can be
associated with only one standard group.
As an example, assume the following very simple example where you want to create two Hgroups called
fem and geom. The fem Hgroup will be associated to a group containing all the finite elements of the
model and the geom Hgroup will be associated to a group containing all the geometry. In addition to that,
the fem and geom Hgroups will contain multiple sub Hgroups associated with groups containing only
portions of the fem or geom Hgroup entities, respectively.
Main Index
296 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
select
Step 1
select
enter
press
Repeat the process for the Hgroup called geom associated to the group called all_geom.
Main Index
Group>Attributes 297
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
• With the Group Hierarchy form displayed and the Action set to Create, and the Group icon
selected, identify or enter the group and Hgroup names. (Do not click Apply at this point.) Type
in all_geom for the group name and geom for the Hgroup name.
• Optionally, click the Group Member icon and add or define the element members of the
all_geom group. (Group members can be added at a later time if desired.) Press the All
Geometry, -Add- button (not shown below). (Do not click Apply at this point either.)
• Use the Parent icon to display and select the newly created group. Select the top level as the
parent: Group Hierarchy. Then click Apply. The Hgroup geom is created associated to the
group called all_geom, which contains all geometric entities of the model.
select
select
enter
press
Main Index
298 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
• The Group icon form to name the sub Hgroup and associated group.
• The Group Member icon form to add information about the entity.
Use the Parent icon form to add the subelement to the Hgroup. First, select the parent Hgroup. Then, click
Apply on the Parent icon form. Continuing with the previous example, we would like to add a sub
Hgroup under the geom Hgroup to furthur refine the hierarchy. The geometry of the model contains two
surfaces. We will create two sub Hgroups under the geom Hgroup, each associated with one of the
surfaces of the model. Similarly we will create two sub Hgroups under the fem Hgroup each associated
with the elements of the particular surface. Thus if you post the fem Hgroup and all its sub Hgroups, you
will get all the fem posted and ikewise, with the geom Hgroup for posted geometry. If you select the sub
Hgroups for posting, then only those entities assicoated with them are posted.
• With the Group Hierarchy form displayed and the Action set to Create, and the Group icon
selected, identify or enter the group and (sub) Hgroup names. (Do not click Apply at this point.)
Type in surface_1 for the group name and surface.1 for the (sub) Hgroup name.
• Optionally, click the Group Member icon and add or define the element members of the
surface_1 group. (Group members can be added at a later time if desired.) Select Surface 1 from
the graphics screen and press the -Add- button under the Member List to Add/Remove . (Do not
click Apply at this point either.)
• Use the Parent icon to display and select the newly created group. Select the geom level as the
parent. Then click Apply. The (sub) Hgroup surface.1 is created associated to the group called
surface_1, which contains just the entity Surface 1.
This operation can then be repeated for creating (sub) Hgroup surface.2, associated with group
surface_2, which contains entity Surface 2 where the Parent Hgroup is geom. The operation can then be
done two more times, once each for creating (sub) Hgroup FEM_surface.1 and FEM_surface.2,
associated with groups fem_surface_1 and fem_surface_2 each containing the finite element entities
associated to the two surfaces, respectively, and each having the fem Hgroup as their parent Hgroup.
Main Index
Group>Attributes 299
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Main Index
300 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
In this example, when both surfaces have been defined as subelements (sub Hgroups of the parent
Hgroup), the group hierarchy will look as follows:
Main Index
Group>Attributes 301
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Posting an Hgroup
The following form is used to display all or parts of the hierarchy tree in the Viewport:
If Auto Post Subtree is checked on the form, all the selected groups and their subgroups and elements
get posted when Apply is clicked.
Main Index
302 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
An additional icon, the Modify icon, is available on the Group Hierarchy form when the Action is
Modify and is used to perform the initial step of a modify operation.
Modify icon
Always start a modify hierarchical group operation by clicking the Modify icon.
For example, if the operation is to change a group name:
• Click the Modify icon and select the Hgroup.
• Click the Group icon and select the group.
• Enter the new name.
• Click Apply.
Main Index
Group>Attributes 303
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Deleting Hgroups
The following form is used to remove the association between standard groups and Hgroups.
Use the checkboxes at the bottom of the form to scale the delete operation. You can delete the entire tree
by selecting Group Hierarchy.
Note that deleted items can be restored by:
• Selecting the Undo option.
• Using the Import form to recreate an exported tree.
Main Index
304 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Main Index
Group>Attributes 305
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Use the following forms to export and import group hierarchy definitions. Use the Select Session File
option on the Export form to create a snapshot by assigning a name to and saving a hierarchy definition
as an export file. To import a saved session file, select the Select Session File option on the Import form.
Main Index
306 Group>Attributes
Hierarchical Groups (Hgroups)
Main Index
Ch. 6: Viewports Patran Reference Manual
6 Viewports
Viewport Concepts and Definitions 308
The Viewport Menu 312
Viewport Commands 313
Main Index
308 Patran Reference Manual
Viewport Concepts and Definitions
Main Index
Ch. 6: Viewports 309
Viewport Concepts and Definitions
Viewport Names
Viewports are given names to differentiate them from one another. In naming a viewport, you must
conform to the following set of rules:
• Uniqueness--each name must be unique.
• Number of characters--name may not contain more than 31 characters.
• “Legal” characters--the following characters are acceptable in names:
a through z
A through Z
0 through 9
-, _ , and .
• Case sensitivity--upper and lower case letters are recognized. For example, top_view and
Top_view are regarded as two distinct views.
Viewport Status
The status of a viewport may be:
• current (or not current)
• posted (or unposted)
• target viewport
Current Viewport
The current viewport is the viewport in which view commands are applied, titles are posted, and
postprocessing is performed. Only one viewport may be current at one time and only the current viewport
is updated when a model is viewed from a new angle or with new results and titles.
Posted Viewport
Posted viewports are the only viewports displayed on the screen. If a viewport is unposted it is hidden
from view.
You can hide any posted viewport but do not unpost the viewport to which the current group is posted,
or else you will not be able to see the geometric and finite element entities as they are created.
Target Viewport
The target viewport is a viewport selected for modifications. Any viewport can become the target
viewport, including the current viewport.
Main Index
310 Patran Reference Manual
Viewport Concepts and Definitions
Only one group can be the current group in a viewport, however in each viewport you can designate a
different group as the current group.
• Origin Symbol--crosshairs that identify the global cartesian origin (0,0,0) location. While this
symbol is ON by default, it can be turned OFF (see Show Origin Symbol, 319).
• Global Cartesian Coordinate Axes--the icon that represents the global Cartesian coordinate axes
is displayed in the viewport’s lower left corner. As the viewing plane is rotated, the orientation
of these axes will change to reflect the new position of the model. While this symbol is ON by
default, it can be turned OFF (see Show Global Axes, 319).
Main Index
Ch. 6: Viewports 311
Viewport Concepts and Definitions
• Local Coordinate Axes--the icon that represents the axes of a locally defined rectangular,
cylindrical, or spherical coordinate system (for more information on local coordinate systems,
see Coordinate Frames, 367 )
Tiling Viewports
Posted viewports can be tiled within the available screen area. Tiling scales viewports so that they are of
the same size and repositions them in rows and columns to fit the viewing area.
Main Index
312 Patran Reference Manual
The Viewport Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it will call up an additional menu form in which you enter
further data.
Viewport
Create...
Post...
Modify...
Delete...
Tile
The Viewport menu functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear.
Main Index
Ch. 6: Viewports 313
Viewport Commands
Main Index
314 Viewport>Create
Creating a New Viewport
With the Viewport>Create command sequence you can create and name new viewports.
Existing Viewports Displays the names of previously defined viewports for your
information. The name of the current viewport is highlighted.
New Viewport Name Enter a unique new viewport name; (see Viewport Names, 309 for
more help).
Note that a newly created viewport automatically becomes the current viewport.
Main Index
Viewport>Post 315
Posting and Unposting Viewports
The Viewport>Post dialog box allows you to post or unpost one or more selected viewports. Posted
viewports are the only viewports visible on the screen. The current viewport is automatically posted.
Post/Unpost Viewports Displays the names of all viewports in the database. The name of the
current view is highlighted since it is automatically posted.
To post a viewport, click on its name to highlight it. When you select
a viewport for posting, all other viewports become unposted and their
names become unhighlighted.
Caution: If you unpost the current viewport, it will not be shown on the screen. Neither will the
current group, which is posted to the current viewport (see Posted Group, 253).
Consequently, you will not be able to see new geometric and finite element entities as
they are created.
Main Index
316 Viewport>Post
Posting and Unposting Viewports
If you select a viewport other than the current viewport for posting, the current viewport will be unposted.
Patran will display the following warning message:
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 317
Modifying Viewports
With the Viewport>Modify command and dialog box you can modify the following viewport
definitions:
• Indetify the viewport targeted for modifications (the target viewport).
• Make the new target viewport current.
• Post/unpost groups to the target viewport.
• Set the current group.
• Apply a named view to the target viewport.
• Rename the target viewport.
Main Index
318 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
Current Viewport Displays the name of the viewport you specified as current.
Target Viewport to Modify Displays the name of the viewport you selected for modification.
Change Target Viewport... Displays the Change Target Viewport dialog box in which you can
select a different viewport for modification.
Make Current Makes the newly specified target viewport the current viewport.
Post/Unpost Groups... Displays a dialog box in which you can select one or more groups to
post or unpost (display or hide) in the target viewport.
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 319
Modifying Viewports
Set Current Group... Displays a dialog box in which you can select a group that will be the
current group in the target viewport.
Apply Named View... Brings up the Apply Named View dialog box in which you can select
a previously defined and named view that will be displayed in the
target viewport.
Rename... Displays a dialog box in which you can specify a new name for the
target viewport.
Attributes Allows you to control various display attributes assigned to the target
viewport.
Background Color Set the viewport background color.
Background Effects Displays a subordinate form to allow a number of different background
color effects such as a gradient between two different colors. This form
is explained below in Changing the Background Effects, 327
Range Name Displays the name of the selected range (or the default range).
Change Range Ranges have an important role in displaying finite element analysis
results. The name of the default range table is standard_range. This
command brings up a dialog box in which you can select a previously
defined and named range table to assign to the target viewport.
Show Spectrum Bar If the toggle is ON (4), the spectrum color bar will be displayed.
Default is OFF.
Show Viewport Legend If the toggle is ON (4), the viewport legend will be displayed. Default
is OFF.
Show Global Axes If the toggle is ON (4), the global coordinate axes will be displayed in
the lower left corner of the target viewport. Default is ON.
Show Origin Symbol If the toggle is ON (4), the crosshairs that identify the global cartesian
origin (0,0,0) location will be displayed in the target viewport. Default
is ON.
Main Index
320 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
X,Y Location Indicates the location of the upper left corner of a viewport. Note the
following:
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 321
Modifying Viewports
Main Index
322 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
Filter Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list (optional). You
may enter a combination of one or more characters and wildcards (*)
then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose name passes the
filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 323
Modifying Viewports
Target Viewport Displays the name of the target viewport in which the change will take
place.
Filter Specification Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list (optional). You
may enter a combination of one or more characters and wildcards (*)
then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose name passes the
filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Post/Unpost Group(s) Displays the names of existing groups. To post a group, click on its
name to highlight it. When you select a group for posting, all other
groups become unposted and their names become unhighlighted.
To select several groups listed consecutively, hold the Shift key while
clicking each item. To select several groups not listed consecutively,
hold the Ctrl key while clicking.
Main Index
324 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
Filter Specification Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list (optional). You
may enter a combination of one or more characters and wildcards (*)
then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose name passes the
filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Existing Names Displays the names of previously defined groups. Pick the group you
wish to specify as the current group in this viewport.
Current Group The name of the newly selected current group will also appear in this
text field.
Note: As an alternative to this command, you can simply click inside the viewport window to
specify it as the current viewport.
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 325
Modifying Viewports
Target Viewport Shows the name of the target viewport in which the named view will
be displayed.
Filter Specification Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list that follows
(optional). You may enter a combination of one or more characters and
wildcards (*) then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose name
passes the filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Named Views Displays the names of existing named views. To apply a named view,
click on its name to highlight it. The view of the model in the target
viewport will then change to the named view as requested.
Main Index
326 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
Renaming a Viewport
If you pressed the Rename... button in the Viewport>Modify dialog box, you will see the subordinate
dialog box shown below.
Filter Specification Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list (optional). You
may enter a combination of one or more characters and wildcards (*)
then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose name passes the
filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Default is the wildcard (*), meaning that all items will be listed.
Existing Names Displays the names of existing viewports. If you specified a filter, only
those viewports that pass the filter criteria will be listed.
Rename As Enter the new name that you want to give to the target viewport.
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 327
Modifying Viewports
Color 1 / 2 Select the color of the background. If both colors are the same, a solid
backgroud of that color is displayed. If the two colors are different,
then a gradation/transition between the two colors is displayed based
on the Shading Syles.
Swap Colors Swaps the colors between Color 1 and Color 2.
Shading Sytels The shading or gradation / transition between the colors can be a
horizontal, vertical, diagonal or other type of effect. It is best to
experiment with these using the Preview button.
Main Index
328 Viewport>Modify
Modifying Viewports
Inside Out Creates a shading from the middle out instead of top to bottom (or right
to left as the case may be).
Preview To preview how the viewport looks before applying the effect
permanently with the Apply button.
Apply / Cancel Press Apply to keep the effect and then Cancel to close the form.
Main Index
Viewport>Modify 329
Modifying Viewports
Target Viewport Displays the name of the target viewport in which the change will take
place.
Filter Minimizes the number of items that appear in the list that follows
(optional). You may enter a combination of one or more characters
and wildcards (*) then press the Filter button. Only the item(s) whose
name passes the filter criteria will be listed in the text field.
Ranges Displays the names of previously defined Ranges. Pick the range you
wish to use for results displays in the target viewport. The newly
selected name will also appear in the Viewport>Modify dialog box.
Main Index
330 Viewport>Delete
Deleting Viewports
With the Viewport>Delete command sequence you can delete any number of viewports--except the
current viewport.
Main Index
Viewport>Tile 331
Tiling Viewports
With the Viewport>Tile command you can display a number of viewports in an ordered “tiled”
arrangement. Extents of viewports are changed so that each view is the same size and viewports are
positioned in rows and columns to fill the viewing area.
Main Index
332 Viewport>Tile
Tiling Viewports
Main Index
Ch. 7: Viewing a Model Patran Reference Manual
7 Viewing a Model
Main Index
334 Patran Reference Manual
View Concepts and Definitions
Current View
Each viewport displays one independent view of a stationary model. The current view is the view most
recently defined for a viewport.
Named Views
If in a work session you rotated, zoomed, scaled, or clipped a view to show a particular aspect of your
model, you can preserve all your modifications with a named view that will be stored and ready to be
recalled at a later time or even in a different model (see Named Views in Viewports, 310). Additionally,
Patran provides several predefined standard engineering views (e.g., top_view) that you can utilize in any
viewport.
When naming a new view, remember that just as in naming groups or viewports, view names must
conform to the following set of rules:
Model Space
Model space is defined in the global X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate system.
Screen Space
Screen space is defined by a projection plane’s X and Y coordinate system.
Main Index
Ch. 7: Viewing a Model 335
View Concepts and Definitions
Y Global Axes
Screen Axes
Global Origin
Y
Observer
Position Focal Point
Z
X
Z
X
Viewing Plane
Viewing Plane
The viewing plane lies in the plane of the screen and is the plane onto which the model is projected.
Window Center
The window center is at the center of the viewing plane.
Model Center
The model center is the geometric centroid of a viewport’s displayed geometric and finite element
entities.
Automatic Centering
The model center is recalculated each time an entity is added or removed, or each time a group is posted
or unposted. However, the focal point may be moved to coincide with the model center.
Main Index
336 Patran Reference Manual
View Concepts and Definitions
Fitting a View
Fitting a view moves and resizes the view of the model so that all model entities will fit inside the current
viewport window. The view’s rotational orientation will remain the same.
View Transformations
Transformations refer to the action of panning, rotating, and resizing a view in the current viewport.
• Pan
Moves the window center left, right, up, or down in the current viewport as if a camera panned
over the model in the view.
• Zoom
Makes the model appear larger (zoom in) or smaller (zoom out) in the viewport.
• Rotate
Rotates the view around selected global or screen axes.
All transformations can be implemented one of three ways:
• The Viewing>Transformations command (see Viewing>Transformations on page 296)--click
the applicable icon to pan, zoom, or rotate a view. Accept a default transformation factor or
specify the desired rate by which the transformation will be performed.
• Other Viewing menu commands--use one of the following Viewing menu commands:
Panning--Select Center (p. 342)
Zooming--Select Corners, and Zoom% (p. 344)
Rotating--Angles (p. 346) and View From/To (p. 348)
• “Mouse method”--program the middle mouse button to execute one of the transformations (see
Preferences>Mouse, 452).
Note: Several shortcuts to some of the view control functionalities are also available via tool bar
icons (see also Mouse Function Tool Palette, 16 and Viewing Tool Palette, 17).
View Clipping
To clip a view, you make use of one or more planes to “slice” into the model at selected locations. Since
the geometry outside the clipping planes will be eliminated from view, with view clipping you can show
the inside of a model as well as create special sectional views. Z-axis clipping provides front and back
clipping planes that are parallel to the XY plane. In arbitrary clipping, you can define, orient, and place
your own clipping planes for specific clipped views.
Main Index
Ch. 7: Viewing a Model 337
View Concepts and Definitions
Perspective Views
Perspective viewing makes surfaces that are farther from the position of an observer appear smaller.
Changing the observer’s position as well as the viewing plane location will modify perspective distortion.
View Parameters
Focal Point
The view’s origin, it is also the center of rotation when the view is rotated, the center for scaling, and the
perspective’s center.
Window Center
The center of the viewing plane from where translation distances are measured.
Focal
Point
Viewing Plane
Z Observer’s
Position
Main Index
338 Patran Reference Manual
The Viewing Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it will call up an additional dialog box in which you enter or
select further data.
If a menu item is followed by an expression containing the abbreviation Ctrl, this item can also be
accessed by an accelerated keyboard shortcut. For example, to activate the Viewing>Transformations
command with the shortcut, press the Ctrl (Control) key and the lower case letter key (t) simultaneously.
Viewing
Transformations... Ctrl T
Fit View Ctrl F
Select Center
Select Corners
Zoom (% of view)
Angles...
Custom...
View From/To...
Scale Factors...
Named View Options...
Clipping Perspective...
Arbitrary Clipping...
The Viewing menu functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear.
Transformations... Displays graphic icons with which you can pan, rotate, and zoom a
view by selected incremental factors. Also provides a Fit View icon to
adjust the view of the model to be contained completely inside the
boundaries of the viewport.
Fit View Moves and resizes the current view so that all model entities will fit
inside the current viewport window. The view’s rotational orientation
will remain the same.
Select Center Pans a view by moving its center to a cursor picked location.
Main Index
Ch. 7: Viewing a Model 339
The Viewing Menu
Main Index
340 Viewing>Transformations
Viewing Commands
With the icons of the View>Transformations dialog box you can pan, rotate, zoom, or fit the view in
the current viewport. Transformations are incremental, each mouse click will modify the view
orientation once by a predefined amount that you specify in the Options... dialog box.
Visually translates (pans) the model in the view left, right, up, or
down, by a selected incremental “pan factor”.
Main Index
Viewing>Transformations 341
Transforming Views
Transformation Options
If you pressed the Options... button in the View>Transformations dialog box, you will see the
subordinate dialog box shown below.
Rotation Displays the rotation angle in degrees. Each mouse click will rotate the
view of the model by that increment. Move the slidebar to the desired
angle value.
Model Relative The rotation takes place about global axes.
Screen Relative The rotation takes place about screen axes.
Main Index
342 Viewing>Transformations
Transforming Views
Pan Factor Displays the panning rate in model units. Each mouse click will move
the view of the model by that increment. Move the slidebar to the
desired panning rate value.
Zoom Factor Displays the zooming rate. Each mouse click will zoom the view of the
model at that rate. Move the slidebar to the desired zoom factor value.
Fit View
Fitting a view moves and resizes the view of the model so that all model entities will fit inside the current
viewport window. The view’s rotational orientation will remain the same (for automatic execution of Fit
View, see Automatic View Settings, 450).
Select Center
The Viewing>Select Center command is an alternative way of panning the model. Click an arbitrary
point in the viewport and the view will be repositioned with its window center at the selected point. Note
that if you picked a point in a viewport other than the current one, that viewport will automatically
become the current viewport.
Select Corners
Using the Viewing>Select Corner command, you can zoom to a cursor-defined rectangular area of the
current view of the model.
Move the cursor to a point at the edge of the area you wish to zoom (P1). This point becomes the first
corner of the rectangle. Click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging it to form the rectangle.
When the rectangle surrounds the desired area, release the mouse button at the opposite corner (P2). The
view’s center will reposition itself to the center of the rectangle, and the selected area will zoom to fill
the viewport.
Main Index
Viewing>Transformations 343
Transforming Views
The viewport in which you select the corners will automatically become the current viewport.
P1
P2
Main Index
344 Viewing>Zoom (% of View)
Zoom by a Specified Factor
Main Index
Viewing>Zoom (% of View) 345
Zoom by a Specified Factor
The Viewing>Zoom (% of View) command lets you specify the zoom rate numerically rather than using
the zoom icon and the slidebar.
Zoom Factor The zoom factor is expressed as a percentage of the fit view size.
Custom... Enter a zoom factor in this subordinate dialog box if you want to use
a zoom factor other than those listed.
Main Index
346 Viewing>Angles
Rotate by a Specified Angle
Use the Viewing>Angles command when you want to enter very specific rotation angles that are not
easily set with the rotation slidebar, or when you want to control the axes about which the view is rotated.
Rotation Terminology
Model The view is rotated about the global model axes. These stay fixed to
the model and rotate with the model.
Screen The view is rotated about the screen axes. These are fixed to the screen
and never move.
Absolute The view is rotated relative to the zero (unrotated) position.
Relative The view is rotated relative to the current view position.
Rotation Angles The angle of rotation may be positive or negative around the
respective axis (follow the right hand rule).
Unit of Rotation The unit of rotation is degree, the allowable range is ±180o.
Center of View Rotation The center of rotation is the focal point (see Observation Point, 348);
the only point that remains fixed during a view rotation. If the center
of rotation does not coincide with the model center, the center of the
model will move, and a portion of the model (or the entire model) will
move outside the viewport during rotation.
Main Index
Viewing>Angles 347
Rotate by a Specified Angle
list2+
Rotate the view as follows:
Main Index
348 Viewing>View From/To
Moving the Observer and Origin Positions
The position of two points, the view origin, or focal point, and the observer position (see Observation
Point, 348) also influence the rotational orientation of a view.
In the Viewing> From/To dialog box, you can enter new coordinates for one or both of these points. If
you move either one--but not the other-- the view will be rotated. If the coordinates of both points are
changed by the same value, the view orientation remains unchanged.
Observation Point The observation point, or observer position, represents the location of
a person viewing the model in a perspective view. To change the
observer position, enter new model space coordinates for the
observation point.
Focal Point The focal point is the view’s origin as well as the center of rotation
when the view is rotated. To change the focal point location, enter new
model space coordinate values.
Model Center The model center is the geometric centroid of a viewport’s displayed
geometric and finite element entities. If you changed the Focal Point
coordinates in the dialog box, this button will return the focal point to
the model center. The observer position will also change accordingly,
in order to maintain the same view rotation.
Main Index
Viewing>Scale Factors 349
Scaling a View
The Viewing>Scale Factors dialog box lets you enter specific scale factors to create a scaled view of the
model.
Screen Scale Factors The scale factors are applied in the X and Y directions of screen space.
The center of scaling is the focal point.
Model Scale Factors The scale factors are applied in the X, Y, and Z directions of model
space. The center of scaling is the focal point.
Main Index
350 Viewing>Named Views
Creating and Manipulating Named Views
With the Viewing>Named View Options command, you can create special views that can be named and
stored for later use. When a named view is applied in a selected viewport, the view of the model will
Main Index
Viewing>Named Views 351
Creating and Manipulating Named Views
change to the same orientation, size, and clipping state defined for the named view. In this dialog box
you can also rename and delete existing named views.
Main Index
352 Viewing>Named Views
Creating and Manipulating Named Views
Rename View... Renames a selected named view. Select the existing view to be
renamed and enter a new name in the subordinate dialog box.
Delete View... Deletes a selected named view. You may confirm or cancel your
request to delete a named view:
Main Index
Viewing>Clipping/Perspective 353
Clippped Views
Main Index
354 Viewing>Clipping/Perspective
Clippped Views
With the Clipping part of this command, you can control the location of the Z-clipping planes visually,
as well as numerically in the dialog box.
Z Min/ Z Max These show the extents of the view of the model in the positive and
negative Z direction.
Front/Back Clipping Planes These text boxes show the current position of the front and back
clipping planes. Enter new values to change the position of either or
both, then press Apply.
You can also change the Z-clipping plane location by simply dragging
the plane symbols to the left or to the right. The changes will apply to
the model immediately, clipping it according to the new distances.
The numerical values in the databoxes will update as well.
Note that the front clipping plane distance must be greater than the
back clipping distance, otherwise, the back clipping plane would end
up in front of the front clipping plane. If you enter wrong values, a
warning message will appear.
Main Index
Viewing>Clipping/Perspective 355
Perspective Views
In the Perspective portion of the dialog box, you can modify the parameters of a perspective view,
namely the location of the viewing plane and the observer position.
Front Clipping
Back Clipping Plane Plane
View Plane Distance The distance between the viewing plane, which is normal to the Z-
axis, and the focal point measured along the Z-axis. If this distance is
zero, the viewing plane intersects the Z-axis at the focal point. A
positive value places the viewing plane to the right of the focal point
while a negative value moves it to the left of the focal point.
Observer Position The distance between the focal point and the location of an
observation point, measured along the Z-axis.
Main Index
356 Viewing>Clipping/Perspective
Perspective Views
Controlling Distortion The distance between the viewing plane and the observer position
controls the distortion caused by perspective viewing. A greater
distance will result in less distortion; as you decrease the distance the
distortion will increase.
Visual Positioning You can control distortion visually by dragging the screen symbols of
the view plane and the observer to the left or to the right. With each
position change the perspective view of the model will update
immediately. Continue until the desired effect is achieved. Note that
the numerical values in the data boxes will be modified as the
respective symbols are repositioned.
Guidelines for View Plane When entering numerical values for these parameters, use the
Distance and Observer following considerations:
Position
• The observer position must be a non-zero positive number.
• The distance of the observer position from the focal point
must be greater than the model tolerance ( see Global Model
Tolerance, 449). If you enter an unacceptable value, a warning
message will be displayed.
• The observer position distance must be greater than the view
plane distance, otherwise, the view plane would end up behind
the observer. If you enter an unacceptable value, a warning
message will be displayed.
Main Index
Viewing>Arbitrary Clipping 357
Creating and Managing User-defined Clipping Planes
Main Index
358 Viewing>Arbitrary Clipping
Creating and Managing User-defined Clipping Planes
The Viewing>Arbitrary Clipping dialog box accepts and displays all necessary information to create
and manipulate arbitrary, or user-defined clipping planes.
Main Index
Viewing>Arbitrary Clipping 359
Creating and Managing User-defined Clipping Planes
Post/Unpost Clipping Lists all previously defined arbitrary clipping planes; the currently
Planes posted (active) clipping planes are highlighted.
The maximum number of clipping planes posted at any one time is six
(use the Ctrl key while picking multiple entries).
Incrementally translates the clipping plane along its normal. You set
the increment in model units in the Number of Units text box. Each
mouse click moves the plane once.
Main Index
360 Viewing>Arbitrary Clipping
Creating and Managing User-defined Clipping Planes
Direction As an alternative to rotating the clipping plane with the rotation icon,
you can enter a new vector to change the direction of the clipping
plane normal. Note that if you do use the rotation icon, the components
of the normal vector will automatically update in this text box.
Location As an alternative to moving the clipping plane with the translation
icon, you can enter the model coordinate location of the clipping
plane. Note that if you do use the icon to move the plane, the location
coordinates will automatically update in this text box.
Main Index
Ch. 8: Display Control Patran Reference Manual
8 Display Control
Display Concepts and Definitions 362
The Display Menu 369
Display Commands 370
Main Index
362 Patran Reference Manual
Display Concepts and Definitions
Display Modes
For controlling entity colors, labels, and render styles you must choose between two display modes:
• Entity mode--targets entities according to entity type. For example, you may specify that
solids must be shaded and green-colored. This specification then will apply to all solids in the
database.
• Group mode--targets entities according to group membership. For example, if Fender and
Wheel comprise two groups in a model, solids in the group called Fender may be rendered in
wireframe while those in Wheel may be shaded.
Display modes are global in nature; whichever you select will apply to the display in all visible
viewports.
Rendering Styles
While you are constructing a geometric or FEM model, it is not necessary to display solids and surfaces
in true-to-life “photographic” appearance. Such display would actually make it difficult to create certain
geometry, such as entities that define the interior of an object. In addition, it would take more time to
perform operations related to many display functions, such as view transformations.
Rendering is a tool that can change the display of solid or surface geometric and FEM entities for
visualization purposes. The basic rendering styles are wireframe and shaded, with additional options
within each of these styles.
Main Index
Ch. 8: Display Control 363
Display Concepts and Definitions
Wireframe
In wireframe, the edges of solid and surface entities are displayed but faces appear transparent. To help
perceive surface contours, however, visualization lines can be drawn in all parametric directions. You
can control the number of lines depending on what it takes to improve visualization (see Number of
Display Lines, 378).
Wireframe/Accurate
This rendering style, used primarily when in group display mode, affords better visualization of a group
that appears in the same viewport with smooth shaded entities of other groups. This technique takes into
consideration changes in depth, therefore it is especially appropriate for showing how certain objects are
positioned behind one another.
Hidden Line
Hidden line rendering also displays the edges of solids and surfaces but the faces appear opaque, not
transparent. As a result, portions of an object that would be hidden from an observer are also hidden in
the display. In some cases this will result in a more realistic image of an object, especially in straight-
edged solids; for curved edges, however, it helps if you use visualization lines in the display.
Main Index
364 Patran Reference Manual
Display Concepts and Definitions
Hidden Line/Accurate
This rendering combines the characteristics of Hidden Line and Wireframe/Accurate styles. It renders
hidden edges and faces invisible and also depicts the correct spatial order of objects.
Shaded/Flat
A compromise between smooth shading and wireframe or hidden line representation is “flat shading”.
Flat shading applies a series of shaded triangles of constant color to faces. Visual accuracy increases as
the number of triangles increases and the size of triangles decreases. The number and size of triangles is
governed by a calculated value called chordal tolerance.
Chordal Tolerance
Database definitions of even the most complex solid or surface objects are mathematically accurate, but
the exact graphical representation of curvatures in solids is, to some extent, at the expense of display
speed and computer resources. Therefore, the screen display of objects is somewhat less precise than the
mathematical data.
With the approximation technique used for creating the display, curved edges are replaced with a series
of straight line segments, or chords. The distance between a curve segment and its subtended chord is the
chordal deviation.
chordal deviation
chord
Main Index
Ch. 8: Display Control 365
Display Concepts and Definitions
Chordal tolerance is calculated as the ratio of the chordal deviation and the length of the curve segment.
It is a user-controllable input that is entered as a display parameter. Bear in mind that while very small
chordal tolerance values produce smoother, more realistic displays, they may also cause the slowing
down of view-related operations.
Shaded/Smooth
The most realistic display of models is the “smooth” shaded image. It renders surfaces and solids
realistically, in a smoothly shaded manner, as if a light were shining on the model. It only shows visible
faces and edges, and does not display those that are hidden from view.
Main Index
366 Patran Reference Manual
Display Concepts and Definitions
edge will be drawn with two line segments; one from the first corner node to the midside node, and one
from the midside node to the second corner node.
QUAD8
Similarly, the default number of display lines on the edges of a QUAD12, a cubic quadrilateral element
with two midside nodes, is three.
It must be emphasized that the display of line segments is strictly a visual tool and has no effect on the
mathematical formulation of elements.
Shrinking Entities
Shrinking is another display tool that can help improve visualization. It reduces the screen size of each
geometric or finite element entity separately by a user-selectable shrink factor, defined in model
percentage. For example, when you shrink adjacent solid components that initially touch one another,
they will become separated (each is individually shrunk by the shrink factor). You can then examine
these entities to be sure that each is geometrically correct. Similarly, you can shrink a FEM mesh to
display finite elements more distinctly within the geometric model.
Shrink action is global, it affects all entities in all viewports. Both geometric and FEM shrink are saved
in the database; if you apply shrink to a model and save it upon exiting, you will find the model in the
same saved shrink state when you open it again.
Titles
Especially useful for proposals or presentations, titles and other textual information enhance the display
of the model. Text is inserted into a selected viewport and is related to the viewport only, not to the model
Main Index
Ch. 8: Display Control 367
Display Concepts and Definitions
nor to the view. Therefore, it remains in position through any view modification (e.g., view panning).
Each viewport may be annotated with different text and titles, however the same text may also be posted
to several viewports.
Coordinate Frames
Local coordinate frames are user-defined coordinate systems, generally created to help build specific
geometry and to evaluate localized results (see also Geometry Modeling, Chapter 3, p. 59). Their
symbols may be displayed or hidden, as desired.
Named Attributes
You can create a named attributes set to save certain changes you made to the geometry or FEM display.
The attributes in the set will then be available any time you work with the model, sparing you from
repeating the display changes.
Spectrums
In Patran, spectrum is a named, ordered set of colors, used for displaying analysis results. For example,
when stress analysis results are superimposed on a model, it is customary to use the colors in the red
family to indicate “hot spots”, or high stress areas, then transition toward the “cool” blue colors where
stresses are low. Spectrums, together with specific range and subrange definitions, interpret the color-
coding of result displays and the underlying numerical values.
Spectrum definition is global; the same spectrum is automatically used in all viewports where analysis
results are displayed.
Ranges
A range is a named collection of ordered subranges that attach numerical meaning to the displayed colors
according to result values. A subrange is generated when the full extent of analysis results (between
defined minimum and maximum values) is divided, automatically or manually, into smaller intervals
with specified starting and ending boundaries. Each subrange is paired with a color in the spectrum. In a
result plot, nodes and elements are shown in the color assigned to the subrange to which their analysis
results belong.
Thresholding cuts down the amount of data utilized for displayed analysis results. It may be used to
eliminate from the result plot those values that fall in the upper or lower extremes of the result range. An
even more important function of thresholding is the ability to delimit a narrow interval, with upper and
lower boundaries, in the vicinity of a particular result value that requires closer examination.
Ranges are not defined globally but linked to viewports. Using this feature, you can simultaneously
display results of multiple analyses (e.g., structural and thermal) with different range definitions in each
viewport.
Main Index
368 Patran Reference Manual
Display Concepts and Definitions
Color Palette
For all color displays, Patran uses a color table of 16 colors. A named, ordered collection of the 16 colors
in various combinations makes up a Color Palette.
Several pre-defined color palettes exist, the one initially used in a new database is named
standard_colortable. You can modify the currently existing colors to create and store any number of new
color palettes in a database.
The first color in a color palette defines the viewport background color.
Color palettes are global in nature and will affect all viewports, therefore, only one color table can be
active at any one time.
Light Sources
The appearance of shaded surfaces is significantly affected by the nature of light that illuminates them.
You can experiment with some of the light-source control features to see which one will make the model
look even more realistic and visually pleasing.
Patran comes with several existing light source definitions, try them before you introduce new light
sources. If these do not produce the effect you are seeking, you can modify an existing light source or
create any number of new ones.
The characteristic features of light are color, intensity, direction, and the distance of the light source from
the object.
In Patran you can choose among the following types of light sources:
• Ambient--a background light, typically used to provide low level lighting around the model.
• Directional--directional light simulates the effects of sunlight. It is spread uniformly across a
surface and its intensity depends only on the direction of the light not on the distance between
the object and the light source.
• Spot--spot light is typically controlled by the location of the light source as well as the direction
of the light. A characteristic feature of this light source is attenuation, the measure of influence
of the distance between the object and the light source on the intensity of light on the surface. At
attenuation = 0, distance has no significance, and spot light is effectively the same as directional
light.
Main Index
Ch. 8: Display Control 369
The Display Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it will call up an additional menu form in which you enter
further data. For more information on using the Display menu forms see Entering and Retrieving Data, 23.
The Display menu functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear.
Entity Color/ Controls colors assigned to entities or groups, turns entity labels on or
Label/Render... off, and defines rendering styles of solid and surface entities.
Plot/Erase... Determines which entities of a model are visible. Erase hides selected
entities from view, Plot redisplays erased entities.
Erase and Plot are global actions that affect the display of all viewports
the same way.
Highlight... Provides a visual accent to a display by changing the color of selected
entities. Highlighting also helps locate entities specified by entity IDs-
-a feature especially useful in a complex model.
Geometry... Controls display attributes that help visualize geometric entities.
Finite Elements... Controls display attributes that help visualize finite element entities.
Load/BC/ Elem. Props... Manages the visibility, colors, and label parameters of the symbols
associated with loads, boundary conditions, and element properties.
Named Attributes... Creates and manages named attribute sets.
Coordinate Frames... Displays or hides symbols of previously defined local coordinate
frames.
Titles... Adds text to viewports.
Spectrums... Generates and manages spectrums and their attributes.
Ranges... Defines ranges, subranges, and thresholds.
Color Palette Establishes customized color tables.
Shading... Sets parameters that affect the shading of a model.
Light Source... Controls lighting attributes, such as the type and position of a light
source and the intensity of light that illuminates model surfaces.
Main Index
370 Display>Entity Color/Label/Render
Display Commands
Main Index
Display>Entity Color/Label/Render 371
Enhancing the Appearance of Entities
In these dialog boxes you specify rendering styles for solid and surface entities, control the colors
assigned to entities or groups, and turn entity labels on or off.
Entity Type Specifies that actions in this command will target entities by type. The
selected rendering style will apply to all surfaces; similarly, colors and
label On/Off designations will affect all entities within a specific
entity class (e.g., all curves).
Group Specifies that the actions of this command will target entities by group
designation. Displays a dialog box in which you define the rendering
style, color, and label On/Off choice as they apply to members of a
selected group.
Main Index
372 Display>Entity Color/Label/Render
Enhancing the Appearance of Entities
Render Style Displays a pop-up menu in which you can select a rendering method.
Shade Color Sets the color of shaded solid and surface entities, if Shaded rendering
was selected. This color will not apply if the object is rendered in
wireframe.
Entity Type Colors and Only in Entity mode, it assigns colors to entities by type. Specifies
Labels whether or not labels will be displayed on an entity class.
• Click the color chip next to the entity type. This will bring up
the “Color Select” form with all available colors.
• In this form, pick a new color for the entity type.
To specify that entities of a particular type should have their labels
displayed, click in the label toggle (4).
Show/Hide All Entity In the Entity mode dialog box; turns labels on or off for all entities.
Labels
Show Labels In the Group mode dialog box; turns labels on or off for all group
members.
Label Font Size Controls the size of entity labels. Note that the font size change can
take effect only if you specify Software Rendering Mode in the
Graphic Preferences Menu ( see Preferences, 425.).
Main Index
Display>Plot/Erase 373
Erasing and Redisplaying Entities
With the Display>Plot/Erase command you can temporarily “hide” (erase) selected entities or redisplay
erased entities (plot).
Main Index
374 Display>Plot/Erase
Erasing and Redisplaying Entities
Both Erase and Plot are global actions; erased entities are removed from every view and plotted entities
are restored to all views. Since erased entities are only hidden from display and not deleted from the
database, the results of the erase action will not be saved when you exit from the database.
Selected Entities Lists entities selected for erasure. You can type entity ID’s, select them
with the mouse (hold the Shift key for multiple selections), or use any
other select mechanism (see Selecting Entities, 33). The text in this
textbox is editable, you can delete any entity ID you did not intend to
include in the list.
Erase Erases the entities contained in the entity list.
Plot Redisplays erased entities contained in the entity list.
Coord. Frames Brings up the Coordinate Frames dialog box in which you can select
the local coordinate frame(s) you want to display or hide from view.
Main Index
Display>Plot/Erase 375
Erasing and Redisplaying Entities
Posted Entities
Geometry Erase/Plot Erases or plots all geometric entities.
FEM Erase/Plot Erases or plots all FEM entities.
All Erase/Plot Erases or plots all entities.
Main Index
376 Display>Highlight
Highlighting Selected Entities
Use the Display>Highlight command to call attention to specific entities or to locate certain entities by
their ID number. The default highlight color is red. If you want to change the default, you have to go to
the Preferences>Graphics command (see Preferences, 425).
Selected Entities Lists the entities you selected for highlighting. Pick entities using any
of the select mechanisms (multiple pick with the Shift key, polygon
pick, etc. see also Selecting Entities, 33). Alternately, type the name
and ID number of entities. The text in this textbox is editable; you can
correct, add or delete any text.
Highlight Performs the highlight action. You need to click this button only if you
entered entity IDs. If you picked entities with the cursor, they will
highlight immediately.
Clear All Clears the highlights as well as the entries from the textbox, but leaves
the dialog box on the screen.
OK Removes the highlights and the dialog box from the screen (pressing
the Enter key will have the same effect).
Main Index
Display>Geometry 377
Modifying the Appearance of Geometric Entities
Main Index
378 Display>Geometry
Modifying the Appearance of Geometric Entities
The Display>Geometry command lets you change certain display attributes of geometric entities. The
modified display features are saved upon exiting the model and will be recalled when you open the
database again.
Number of Display Lines Specifies the number of display lines used to help visualize solids or
surfaces in Wireframe or Hidden Line rendering (see Hidden Line,
363). By default, the number of display lines = 0, meaning that only
the entity’s boundaries are shown.
Chordal Tolerance Shows the selected chordal tolerance value that controls the precision
of the display of solid geometry (see Chordal Tolerance, 364).
Main Index
Display>Geometry 379
Modifying the Appearance of Geometric Entities
Geometric Shrink Shows the model percentage by which the display of each geometric
entity will be reduced. At default = 0, no shrinking takes place.
Show Parametric Direction Displays the location and orientation of the parametric axes of
geometric entities. This information may be essential in certain
geometric and finite element applications, for example, the parametric
directions of a surface determine the direction of element normals,
that in turn defines the positive direction of pressure loads on the
surface.
Show Free Faces Shows free faces of solids. This feature is useful when you import
CAD geometry that might contain gaps that will prevent you from
creating acceptable meshes on the model.
Point Size Increases or decreases the display size of geometric points to aid
visualization.
Colors and Labels Controls the colors and label display of geometric entities. This dialog
is the same as in the command Display>Entity Color/Label/Render
(see Display>Entity Color/Label/Render, 370), except it applies only to
geometric entities. The two commands work together, the latest input
in either one will become the prevailing color definition and will show
up in both dialog boxes.
Coordinate Frames Posts or unposts symbols of previously defined local coordinate
frames.
Note: You can save the first five of the geometry attributes in a named attribute set (see Named
Attributes, 367.
Main Index
380 Display>Finite Elements
Modifying the Appearance of FEM Entities
Main Index
Display>Finite Elements 381
Modifying the Appearance of FEM Entities
The Display>Finite Elements command can change certain display attributes of FEM entities. Modified
display features are saved when you save and exit the model, and will be recalled when you open the
database again.
Main Index
382 Display>Finite Elements
Modifying the Appearance of FEM Entities
Number of Line Segments Defines the number of line segments used to approximate the
per Edge curvature of element edges. Default=0, which is to be interpreted as
accepting the minimum number of line segments needed to connect
the nodes located on each edge (number of midside nodes plus one).
FEM Shrink Shows the model percentage by which the display of each FEM entity
will be shrunk. At default=0, no shrinking takes place.
Show Only Free
Edges A free edge is a boundary edge of an element that is not shared by at
least one other element. When this toggle is on, only free edges are
displayed. This display tool can help you verify whether there are any
discontinuities in the finite element model.
Faces A free face is an element face that is not shared by at least one other
element. When this toggle is on, only the free faces are displayed. This
too can help you verify the continuity of the finite element model.
Node Size Increases or decreases the display size of nodes to aid visualization.
Colors and Labels Controls the colors and label display of FEM entities. This dialog is
the same as in the command Display>Entity Color/Label/Render
(see Display>Entity Color/Label/Render, 370, except it applies only to
FEM entities. The two commands work together, the latest input in
either one will become the prevailing color definition and will show
up in both dialog boxes.
Coordinate Frames Posts or unposts symbols of previously defined local coordinate
frames.
Connector Attributes Additional Connector display attributes may be defined via the
Connector Attributes form, invoked by selecting this button.
Note: You can save the first five of the FEM attributes in a named attribute set (see Named
Attributes, 367).
Main Index
Display>Finite Elements 383
Modifying the Appearance of FEM Entities
Display 2D Markers Use these checkboxes to turn the display of 2D (bars) and 3D (spheres)
Display 3D Markers markers ON/OFF, independent of each other (default ON).
Scale The scale to be applied to the connectors diameter when calculating
the size of the spheres upon display.
If the 3D Marker Size is set to Absolute, then the label of this databox
becomes Diameter, and fixed model space diameter is specified.
Unverified Connectors The color that unverified connectors shall be displayed in. In the event
that the underlying model of a connector is changed (like a remesh),
then the connector will be flagged as Unverified, until it is re-verified.
Such connectors shall be displayed in an alternate color, defined here.
Main Index
384 Display>Finite Elements
Modifying the Appearance of FEM Entities
Main Index
Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes 385
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Main Index
386 Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
With this command you can control the display symbols for loads, boundary conditions, and element
properties.
Main Index
Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes 387
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Show on FEM Only Functional assignments, such as loads, boundary conditions, and
element properties may be applied either directly to geometry or to the
finite element model. By default, all symbols are displayed and
positioned at the entities to which they had been applied. If this toggle
is on, only those symbols are displayed that represent loads, boundary
conditions, or element properties applied to FEM entities.
Show LBC/ El. Property Certain loads and boundary conditions, and some element properties
Vectors are vector entities and their symbols are directed arrows. Generally,
their numerical values are also displayed. If you turn this option OFF,
both the vectors and the numbers will be turned OFF.
Show LBC/ El. Property If you turn this OFF, but keep the Vectors on, the symbols will be
Values displayed but not the numerical values.
Vectors/Filters Displays the Vector Attributes dialog box in which you can select the
length and color properties of display vectors. Optionally, you can
also stipulate that vectors be displayed according to some filtering
mechanism, e.g., if the numeric value they represent exceeds some
specified minimum.
Label Style Displays the Label Style dialog box that provides options for the
display format of the numerical values of functional assignments.
Beam Display Presents various options for identifying and displaying beam
elements.
Display Pin DOFs If ON, displays the degrees of freedom of the pinned connection.
Display Spring DOFs If ON, displays the degrees of freedom assigned to a spring element.
Main Index
388 Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Vector Attributes
In this dialog box you can designate length, color, and filtering characteristics for the vectors that
represent loads, boundary conditions, or certain element properties.
Main Index
Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes 389
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Vector Length
Constant - The length of the vector symbols is constant. When you use this option
Screen Relative/ all vectors are of the same length; for example, a vector that represents
a 100 lb force will be just as long as the one that represents a 1,000 lb
Model Relative force.
Main Index
390 Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Label Style
Label style refers to the display format of the numerical values attached to symbols.
Label Format
Fixed The numbers are displayed in a decimal format.
Exponential The numbers are displayed in exponential format.
Integer The numbers are displayed as integers.
Significant Figures When using decimal or exponential format, you can specify the desired
number of significant figures either with the slider or by typing it in the
textbox.
Main Index
Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes 391
Symbols for Loads, Boundary Conditions, and Element Properties
Beam Display
This attribute controls the way beam elements of a mesh (e.g., on the edge of a plate) are displayed on
the screen.
2D:Mid-Span + Offsets Beam section shape is displayed at the mid-span location of each beam
element. Offsets are also shown.
3D:Full Span Beam section shape is displayed over the full span of elements.
3D:Full Span + Offsets Beam section shape is displayed over the full span of elements. Offsets
are also drawn.
Note: In 3D options, the beam sections are rendered in the rendering style specified for the model
with the Display>Entity/Color/Label/Render command.
Main Index
392 Display>Named Attributes
Creating and Managing Named Attribute Sets
Use the Display>Named Attributes command to create, rename, or delete a unique set of display
attributes that you wish to recall during other work sessions with the current model.
Select Current Set Lists the existing attributes set names. Two default sets, general and
simple already exist. After you create a new set, its name will appear
in this area. Pick the attribute set you want to use.
Current/New Set If you pick an existing set, its name will appear here. To crate a new
Named Attribute set:
Main Index
Display>Named Attributes 393
Creating and Managing Named Attribute Sets
Main Index
394 Display> Coordinate Frames
Displaying User-defined Coordinate Frames
In the Display>Coordinate Frames dialog box you can select one or more previously defined local
coordinate frames for posting.
Post/Unpost Coordinate Lists the names and IDs of currently defined coordinate frames. Select
Frame(s) the coordinate frame you want to display, or “post”. For multiple
selections, hold down the Shift key to pick names listed consecutively,
or the Ctrl key to pick non-consecutive names.
Post/Unpost All Displays all coordinate frames, or removes all coordinates from the
screen.
Select Coordinate Frame(s) Provides another way of selecting one or more coordinate frames for
posting. Type the ID of the coordinate frame or pick it with the cursor.
Use the Shift key for multiple selection.
Main Index
Display>Titles 395
Adding Text to Viewports
With the Display>Titles command you can create and modify titles and other text displayed in a
viewport.
Post/Unpost Titles Lists defined titles. To insert existing text into the viewport, select the
text you want then pick the viewport in which it will be displayed. The
text will be placed at the upper left portion of the viewport. You can
drag it to any other part of the viewport, as long as the Titles dialog
box is on the screen.
Main Index
396 Display>Titles
Adding Text to Viewports
Post New Title Automatically displays the new text you typed as soon as you select
Create or press the Enter key.
Create Inserts text in a selected viewport. To create new text or title:
• Click on the text you want to edit; the text will be entered in
the Target Title textbox.
• Press Rename. The Rename dialog box will appear.
• Enter the new text and press Apply.
• Click on the text you want to delete; the text will be entered in
the Target Title textbox.
• Press Delete. The following message will appear:
Main Index
Display>Spectrums 397
Creating and Managing Spectrums
Main Index
398 Display>Spectrums
Creating and Managing Spectrums
With the Display>Spectrums command you can define new spectrums or modify existing ones for
displaying analysis results.
Main Index
Display>Spectrums 399
Creating and Managing Spectrums
Current Spectrum Lists the names of all spectrums defined in the database and highlights
the currently used spectrum. Patran software comes with several
predefined spectrums.
Create Creates a new spectrum by placing the colors in the standard spectrum
in a different order. When you press this button, a subordinate dialog
box will appear in which you can specify the new spectrum attributes.
Number of Colors Specifies the number of colors in the new spectrum; this number must
be between 3 and 16.
Note that after a spectrum has been created, the number of colors
cannot be modified.
Spectrum Attributes
Continuous Color Displays the color bar in the viewport as a continuum of colors without
the separation lines.
Interpolation Factor Controls interpolation between any two colors in a continuous-display
spectrum. The default value of 2.0, representing quadratic
interpolation, is generally acceptable.
Spectrum/ Color Table The left-hand column is for defining the new spectrum, the right-hand
column is the standard color table. To change the definition of a color
button:
Main Index
400 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
All of the data entered on the Range form is now stored in the Patran database. This is most useful for
customizing the range labels and for defining ranges that automatically update to fit the current results
data being plotted. You can choose from several different methods to generate the range intervals. Your
method choices and all associated data are stored in the Patran database. The results plotting tool then
uses these setting to regenerate the range intervals based on the current results data and the Method and
parameters you defined for the range.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 401
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
The Display Ranges form shown below allows you to create and manage named range definitions that
associate numerical intervals to the colors of the current spectrum and are used to color code data in a
plot.
The options listed in the Action pull down menu located at the upper left corner of the Ranges form allow
you to set the forms operational mode. The operations are Create, Copy, Modify, Assign to Viewport,
and Delete.
• Create allows you to create a new range definition.
Main Index
402 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
• Copy allows you to make a copy of an existing range definition, with a new name. This copy can
be your starting point for a new range definition.
• Modify allows you to change the definition of an existing range.
• Assign to Viewport lets you select an existing range to be used for the current or any existing
Viewport.
• Delete allows you to delete one or more existing range definitions. Each Action option is fully
described in the sections that follow.
The options located in the Range Names frame allow you to specify
the name of the new range. You can either enter a new name into the
New Range name edit box or select an existing range name by
pressing the Existing Ranges button. If you select an existing range
name the Ranges form will be updated to show the definition of the
range you selected. This method us typically selected if you want to
use an existing range as the starting point for your new range creation.
You will need to change the selected range name if you do not want
the exiting range definition to be over written.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 403
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Data Methods
Data Methods define the algorithm that you would like to use to create
the range intervals.
Algorithms Auto: Auto is the algorithm used in the previous versions of the
Ranges form, with new capabilities added to the Fit Results function.
These new capabilities will be described below. A typical use scenario
for the Auto option is to first enter the number of sub-ranges for the
new range you are creating and then press the Fit Results button to
map result values into the range spread sheet as a starting point for
defining the new range intervals.
When you press the Fit Results button the Existing Plots form will
appear. This form has been added for this release. Previously the result
values of the current range tool would be loaded into the Ranges
spreadsheet. Now you can select any existing posted or unposted plot.
The selected plot’s results values to be loaded into the Ranges spread
sheet. After selecting an existing plot press the Apply button to cause
your selection to be set and to close the Existing Plots form. Next,
press the Calculate button to update the spread sheet, the Start and End
Value edit boxes with the result values of the plot you selected. You
can now modify the Start and End values and then to press the
Calculate button again to update the spreadsheet relative to your
changes.
Main Index
404 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Delta: The Delta method requires you to enter the Number of Sub-
ranges, Start, and Delta values. The new range intervals will be created
beginning at the Start Value, having subinterval lengths of Delta size,
and will extend from the Start Value to an end value defined by the
product of the number of intervals and Delta length.
2) Starting with the minimum value the distance between it and the
next value is compared to the current Bin Size. The units of the Bin
Size and distance values are defined by the Bin Method, which can be
set to either Percent or Delta value units. If the distance is less than or
equal to the Bin Size the second value is contained in the first range
interval. If the distance is larger than the Bin Size the data value
defines the first data value to be included in the next range interval.
Step 2 is repeated using the initial value included in the new range
subinterval as the value to be compared with values that are greater
than it. This process stops when either the last data value is compared
and included in a range interval or the number of intervals exceeds the
Number of Sub-ranges values set by the user. If the number of sub-
ranges exceeds the Number of Sub-ranges than the process exits if
Failure Recovery is set to None.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 405
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
None: You must enter all of the values. No values are calculated for
you, nor are any values automatically copied to other cells.
From and To: You must enter the From and To values for each range
interval. The Middle value is calculated for you and entered
automatically.
From gets To: You must enter the From values for each range
interval. The To values are set to the adjacent interval’s From values.
The Middle values are also calculated and set automatically for you.
To gets From: You must enter the To values for each range interval.
The From values are set to the adjacent interval’s To values. The
Middle values are also calculated and set automatically for you.
Middle only: You must enter each range interval’s Middle value.
Simple arithmetic averaging of adjacent interval Middle values is used
to define the To and From values that occur between adjacent Middle
values.
Mid +/- Delta and Mid +/ %: You must enter each range interval’s
Middle value and a single delta value. The interval’s From and To
values will be calculated by adding and subtracting the delta value
from the interval’s Middle value respectively. The value is either the
value you entered or the product of the decimal equivalent of the
percent integer you entered and the current Middle value. You can
change the Delta or Delta Percent Value at any time. This will only
affect intervals set after the change. Intervals already defined will not
be affected by the change.
From + Delta and From + %: You must enter each range interval’s
From value and a single delta value. The interval’s To value will be
calculated by adding the value to its From value. The value is either
the value you entered or the product of the decimal equivalent of the
percent integer you entered and the current From value. The Middle
value is calculated and set automatically for you.
Main Index
406 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
The Auto, Delta, and Delta Log Data Methods Algorithms allow you
to define Range Thresholds. Thresholding allows you to manually
define the size of the upper and lower range intervals. The remaining
intervals are located between these and defined by the Data Method
Algorithm you chose to use. A typical use of Thresholding is to
temporarily redefine the range to focus on a subset of result values to
determine where these occur with in the simulation model. The upper
and lower threshold values can be defined entering a result value or a
percent value. If a result value is entered then the lower and upper
intervals will be defined to have a length of minimum result value to
lower value and upper value to maximum result value respectively.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 407
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Attributes
Allow Overwrite: If turned off this option will not allow the range’s
definition to be modified when attributes of a tool that uses it are
changed. This is to prevent accidental overwriting of your range by an
auto-ranging result plot.
Post When Used: This option causes the range to be posted to the
Viewport if a results tool that is posted in a Viewport references it.
Main Index
408 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
General Information You can now customize Range labels. You can now control labels for
Concerning Range Labels values inside and outside the range as well as labels for values that fall
with in the maximum to minimum range bounds but do not map to an
interval within the range. Any combination of these labels can be
toggled on/off. Range labels can now include prefix and suffix text
that can be applied to all subinterval labels. Custom labels can be
defined for any label by pressing in its Custom button. Once this is
done the label becomes editable by the user. The following sections
describe the four sections of the Range form that contain the range
label controls offered to the user.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 409
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Label Display
Label Display allows you to control the display of the To, Middle, and
From labels of each interval with in the range. For the Middle label
you can define a tolerance style format using the Tolerance option.
The choices of Tolerance are described below:
+/- Delta: The label will appear as the middle value plus the value if
added and subtracted from the middle value would derive the
interval’s From and To values respectively.
+/- Delta: The label will appear as the middle value plus a percent of
the middle value that if it were added or subtracted from the middle
would derive the interval’s From and To values respectively.
From:To This option allows you to label the interval at its middle
location with the From and To values that define the extent of the
interval.
When the Use All Custom Labels button is pressed, labels that you
have not customized (i.e. the Custom button for the label is depressed)
will be turned on regardless of the state of its To/Middle/From toggle
button that globally turns on/off the labels at these range interval
positions.
Main Index
410 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Label Controls
Reset All: If this button is pressed all the Custom buttons associated
to the labels will be turned off and the custom text you have entered
will be deleted.
No Data: This edit box allows you to define text that will decorate the
range and spectrum interval used to show the regions of the model
where no analysis data is available.
Label Style
Label Style controls are used to define the format and color of the
range labels. The range labels are now styled independent from the
plot’s value labels. The range label color, font size, format (i.e. fixed,
exponential, integer) and number of significant digits can be
controlled.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 411
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
No Matching Sub-range
The options included in this section of the form let you control a
special range interval that is used to represent result values that do not
belong to any of the range intervals. The various Use Sub-range
options are as follows.
Main Index
412 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Copy
You can also modify existing ranges by using the Create Action of the
Ranges form but you will always be asked to verify that you would
like to apply your changes to the existing range.
Main Index
Display>Ranges 413
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Assign to Viewport
Main Index
414 Display>Ranges
Defining Ranges and Sub-ranges for Results Display
Delete
To delete an existing range definition just set the Ranges form Action
pull down option menu to Delete. Select the existing ranges you
would like to delete by first pressing the Existing Ranges button,
highlighting the range names you would like to delete, and then
pressing the Apply button at the bottom of the Existing Ranges form.
Main Index
Display>Color Palette 415
Creating and Managing Color Configurations
Main Index
416 Display>Color Palette
Creating and Managing Color Configurations
In the Display>Color Palette dialog box you can customize all colors used in the current database.
Current Color Palette Lists the name of all Color Palettes that exist in the database and
highlights the currently used Color Palette. Patran provides the
following three default color tables: gray_scale, rgb_colortable and
standard_colortable.
Color Table Displays the 16 colors of the current color palette. The color at the top
of the column determines the background color of viewport displays.
To change a color, click on the color chip then use one of the
modification methods to create the effect you want.
Main Index
Display>Color Palette 417
Creating and Managing Color Configurations
Color Table Modifications You can choose between two methods of modifying colors:
Main Index
418 Display>Shading
Controlling the Appearance of Light on Surfaces
Main Index
Display>Shading 419
Controlling the Appearance of Light on Surfaces
The Display>Shading command controls the way light interacts with surfaces displayed in shaded
rendering.
Main Index
420 Display>Shading
Controlling the Appearance of Light on Surfaces
Specular Reflection Sets the degree of light reflection in an object’s specular region, the
area of the surface that is normal to the light source. If this value = 1,
all light will be reflected in the specular region.
Diffuse Reflection Controls the degree of reflection throughout the surface of the whole
object. At higher values more of the surface area will be lighted. If this
setting is low and the specular reflection is high, the object will appear
brightly lit where the light is normal to the surface then the light will
dissipate all over the surface.
Highlight Size Illustrates the relative sizes of specular regions on surfaces.
Specular Color Specifies whether the color of the object or the color of the light source
will affect the color of the specular area.
Main Index
Display>Light Source 421
Managing the Illumination of Surfaces
Main Index
422 Display>Light Source
Managing the Illumination of Surfaces
With the Display>Light Source command you can create new light sources and control the light that
affects the shading of surfaces.
Post/Unpost Light Sources Lists all light sources defined in the database and highlights the
currently active (posted) light source(s). Pick the name of a light
source to post it. For multiple selections, hold down the Shift key to
pick consecutively listed items, use the Ctrl key for names not listed
consecutively.
Target Light Source Identifies the light source selected for modifications.
Main Index
Display>Light Source 423
Managing the Illumination of Surfaces
Create Creates a new, named light source. Displays a subordinate dialog box,
in which you enter the name and select the type of the light source.
Direction Displays the coordinates of the end point of the light direction vector.
Location Displays the coordinates of the light source location (the start of the
light direction vector).
Color Shows the color of light selected for the target light source.
Intensity Controls the intensity of the light from low (0.0) to high (1.0).
Attenuation Applied to spot lights only, it controls the change in intensity based on
the distance of the light source from the object.
Opposing Light Sources When displaying surface entities, for each posted light source an
opposing light source is created to illuminate those faces whose
surface normals point away from the light source.
Main Index
424 Display>Light Source
Managing the Illumination of Surfaces
Main Index
Ch. 9: Preferences Patran Reference Manual
9 Preferences
Main Index
426 Patran Reference Manual
Preferences Concepts and Definitions
Analysis Codes
Analysis codes are the finite element programs you use to perform the analysis. Possible analysis codes
include MD Nastran (default), MSC.Marc, and various others may also be accessible. The analysis code
you pick here depends on what is available at your site.
Finite element analysis codes have their own specific way of defining components of a FEM model and
of formatting analysis input and output data. Therefore, the code you select will also determine the
following:
• available analysis type
• element type, shape, and property definitions
• material property definitions
• applicable loads and boundary conditions
• code-specific forms in the Analysis application.
Analysis Types
The analysis code you selected also determines which kind of finite element analysis can be accessed.
Structural, thermal, and fluid dynamics analyses are the most frequently used types available for most
analysis code applications.
Main Index
Ch. 9: Preferences 427
Preferences Concepts and Definitions
code, Patran will transfer as much code-specific data as possible to the new code according to the
Preference Mapping option you select.
Preference Mapping
Patran offers three mapping options each providing a unique level of conversion and user control.
1. Mapping Functions - Running a series of PCL commands, you can produce customized mapping
tables that you use when switching from one analysis code to another. These mapping tables
precisely define how element properties and material properties are translated from one particular
code to another.
2. Legacy Mapping - This option employs default mapping tables such that the most obvious data is
mapped to the new code and the more complex data is left untouched. Earlier versions of Patran
were limited to this default mapping.
3. No Mapping - Using this option the database remains unchanged when switching from one
analysis code to another. No mapping of any kind is done. The advantage to this option is that you
can change preferences, perhaps just to see what capabilities a code has, without changing the
model.
The mapping option you select will depend on the issues pertinent to your model and to the analysis
codes. For example: 1) do the fem entities (nodes, elements, mpc’s) map over correctly; 2) are there
equivalent loads and boundary conditions, contact, material and element properties; 3) are there
equivalent analysis procedures, and will they convert correctly when you change the analysis preference?
Model Tolerance
Tolerance specifies the maximum distance within which two like entities (e.g., nodes), are said to be
coincident. Tolerance, being a global parameter, remains valid for both geometric and FEM construction.
The same tolerance value will apply to geometric entities imported in a CAD database.
Model tolerance may be specified as an absolute number (normally 0.005) or it may be based on the
maximum model size. In the latter case, the recommended tolerance is 0.05% of the expected maximum
model size. However, you may specify a different tolerance depending on how accurately the imported
geometry was constructed.
Warning Messages
Occasionally Patran issues a warning in conjunction with a command or entity selection. Warning
messages are output to the history window and to the session file and, by default, are also shown on the
screen. You may choose to sound just a warning bell rather than the screen display, or omit warning
notifications altogether.
Main Index
428 Patran Reference Manual
Preferences Concepts and Definitions
Hardware Rendering
If your system is set up to access a hardware graphics device for graphics displays (The settings.pcl file,
47) you can choose to render shaded images through that device. Hardware generation of images
typically takes less time but, in general, software rendering is more accurate and even offers more display
options (e.g., texturing effects).
Representing Geometry
In earlier versions of Patran (e.g., PATRAN 2), curves, surfaces, and solids were created as parametric
cubic, bicubic, and tricubic geometry. An option in the Preferences Geometry dialog box enables you to
create parametric cubic geometry that can be exported to a neutral file.
Model Units
The vehicle that Patran uses to create solid geometry is a modeler named Parasolid. Parasolid assumes
model units in meters. Although Patran is “unitless” (dimensions can be interpreted in any unit system),
because of Parasolid, a scale factor is used when creating solid geometry ( see Parasolid Model Units,
158). The default scale factor is set in the Preferences menu.
Main Index
Ch. 9: Preferences 429
The Preferences Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it calls up an additional dialog box in which you enter further
data.
Preferences
Analysis...
Global...
Graphics...
Mouse...
Picking...
Report...
Geometry...
Finite Element...
Main Index
430 Patran Reference Manual
The Preferences Menu
The Preferences menu functionalities are described below in the order in which they appear.
Analysis... Selects the finite element analysis code and the type of analysis that
will be performed.
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 431
Preferences Commands
With the Preferences>Analysis command you specify the analysis code you will use to run the finite
element analysis calculations and select the kind of analysis you want to perform. Setting the Analysis
Preference activates code-specific definitions in the Patran database.
Analysis Code Specifies the analysis program used for analyzing the model.
Main Index
432 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Input File Suffix Displays the file name extension used by the analysis code to identify
a finite element input data file.
Output File Suffix Displays the file name extension used by the analysis code to identify
a finite element result (output) data file.
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 433
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Preference Mapping
• Mapping Functions Using PCL generated mapping tables, you can convert many of the
complex parts of the code-specific model from one analysis code to
another. In particular, mapping functions allow for the mapping of
element and material properties.
Mapping functions do not include converting contact conditions or
analysis procedures. These parameters change so extensively from
one code to another that generic mapping procedures are not
possible. It is possible to write your own specific PCL functions that
would map contact conditions or analysis procedures from one
specific code to another specific code. These PCL functions can
then be attached in the mapping procedure.
Main Index
434 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Mapping Functions
Patran uses mapping tables to convert code-specific definitions from one analysis code to another. These
mapping tables are specific to the old and new analysis codes and separate mapping tables are required
for material properties and element properties.
A limited number of mapping tables are included in the Patran delivery. These mapping tables have been
generated as part of included example problems or generated to map previously supported analysis
solvers over to currently supported solvers. For example, the mapping tables for mapping from the MD
Nastran Preference to the MSC.Marc Preference are included and an example illustrates the full model
conversion between these solvers. In addition, you can access the MSC website under Product Updates
for the latest information on mapping tables.
Material property mapping tables and element property mapping tables are generated through separate
procedures that involve using spreadsheets to define translation instructions, converting spreadsheets to
PCL functions, then compiling those into the system to be executed during a preference change.
Once these mapping tables are generated they can be used repeatedly to switch between analysis codes.
Important: rocedure. Information in the Patran database that pertains to the old analysis code is
overwritten with information for the new analysis code.
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 435
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
numbers from converting incorrectly. When opening the text file, Excel presents a form for converting
the data. Verify that “Delimited” is selected. Then hit “Next” and verify that “Tab” is the selected
delimiter. Then hit “Next” once more, select all the columns and choose “Text” as the “Data Format”.
Then hit “Finish”. The second point to remember is that spreadsheets read by Patran need to be tab
delimited text files. Therefore, when saved out of Excel, they need to be saved as text files rather than
Excel files. (The .xls file extension used above is just a convenient way to launch Excel.)
Main Index
436 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Prior to changing the Analysis Preference, type in the command (on the command line):
map_materials.generate_leaflist( )
Change the Analysis Preference and repeat the command above.(You may have to restart
Patran.)
For each material model in the original code (CodeA) enter a corresponding Leaf Number (from
Code B) that designates what the material model will be translated to in the new code in the 3rd
column, labeled “Maps To Leaf.”
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 437
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
map_materials.map_materials(“CodeATypeMaterials”,
”CodeBTypeMaterials”,”CodeAtoCodeBMaterials.xls”)
This command generates the file CodeAtoCodeBMaterials.xls.
4. Map Material Sets
For each material property, enter the Leaf Numbers from CodeA in the column labeled Old ID.
Selecting which input data boxes should be mapped from Code A to Code B is up to your
judgement and experience.
Main Index
438 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
map_materials.Convert_To_PCL(“CodeAtoCodeBMaterials.xls”,”
CodeAtoCodeBMaterials”)
This generates a file named: CodeAtoCodeBMaterials.pcl. Remember, Code A and Code B are
the exact preference names (without spaces or decimals).
6. Compile the PCL Function
Prior to changing the Analysis Preference, type in the command (on the command line - all one
line):
map_properties.create_property_spreadsheet(“Code”,”Type”,
”Filename.xls”)
The “Code” and “Type” are case sensitive with the full name with decimals included and should
be entered exactly as they appear on the Analysis Preference form, for example “MSC.Marc” and
“Structural.” However “Filename.xls” can be whatever you want to name your property
spreadsheet such as “MarcStructuralProps.xls.”
Now, change the Analysis Preference to what you want to map to or from and repeat the
command above.
Keep track of whatever you name the spreadsheet as you will be needing this later.
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 439
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
A property set is defined by the following information: a dimension, an element type, five
element options (geometric, condensation, laminate, formulation, and dof set), a topology, two
material rules (directionality i.e., materials category and linearity i.e., constitutive model) and a
set of property words. It is this data that is shown in the second section of the “Property Set
Spreadsheet” with the following exceptions. The topology and material rules are not shown, and
only one of the possible dof set element options is shown.
The first and most tedious part of creating a property set mapping is to match “Source” property
sets with “Destination” property sets. You will note that the first two columns in the “Property
Set Spreadsheets” (in the property set and property word sections) are “Source” and
“Destination”. The “Destination” column is just a count for identification. A mapping pair is
created by entering one or more source property set counters in the “Source” column.
For example, when mapping Abaqus to MSC.Marc consider the first two Abaqus property sets,
which are “Point Mass” and “Rotary Inertia.” In MSC.Marc, translational and rotational mass are
defined by the “Mass” property set. Therefore, we want to translate all Abaqus “Point Mass” and
“Rotary Inertia” property sets to MSC.Marc “Mass” property sets. This is done, by entering “1,2”
in the “Source” column in the MSC.Marc “Property Set Spreadsheet” on the line containing the
“Mass” property set (which happens to be the first one). This says source property sets 1 and 2
map to destination property set 1.
Main Index
440 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Property words with the same IDs map automatically, regardless of the name. (The name is just
an analysis code specific label.) Property words with different IDs but the same meaning
(represent the same physics) are mapped like property sets. The counter for the source word is
entered in the “Source” column of the destination spreadsheet. For example, Abaqus has two
thickness definitions, “Shell Thickness -- ID 1080” and “Membrane Thickness -- ID 1081”.
These two words should map to the MSC.Marc property word “Thickness -- ID 36”. This is done
by entering “72,73” in the “Source” column in the MSC.Marc “Property Set Spreadsheet” on the
line containing “Thickness – ID 36” (which is the 26th property word). So we have mapped
source property word 72 and 73 to destination property word 26.
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 441
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
map_properties.create_mapping_spreadsheet(“Filename1.xls”,
”Filename2.xls”,”CodeATypetoCodeBTypeProps.xls”)
This spreadsheet shows each pair of source and destination property sets along with their source
and destination property words. This block of data defines how the data will map. The first two
lines of each block show the source and destination property set name, element type and element
options. Following this are the source and destination property word maps. At this point, the
mapped words include words with identical IDs and words that have been specifically mapped.
Not all source property words will map. (In this case, the corresponding cell in the “Destination”
column is blank.) If the data cannot be used by the destination Analysis Code, it can be ignored.
It will remain in the database, but will not be visible to the user. However, queries for element
property data by forward translators, etc. will have to account for property words that are
“unknown” to that Analysis Code. This is also true for unmapped property sets.
5. Make Additional Mappings
Some property words may not map in a general way. For example, you may want a property word
to map only for a specific property set. In this case, you can paste the destination word into the
appropriate cell next to the source word. Note that the spelling of the property word and the
accompanying ID must be accurate. The double hyphen is used as a delimiter and is therefore
also important.
If a complex translation is required, the general function can be used. See the section below
describing the use of the general function.
Conflicts
There are possible conflicts with acceptable data types or data values. For example, the source
Analysis Code allows either a real or a real nodal field to define a specific property word but the
destination Analysis Code only allows a real. Let’s assume we have one of these property sets to
convert and a real nodal field has been used for this property word. By default, the field will be
stored. This can be overridden by entering “No” in the column labeled “Store Incorrect
Datatype”. Likewise, if the source Analysis Code does not impose a limit on a specific property
word, but the destination Analysis Code does, the data will be mapped unless directed otherwise.
As mentioned above, queries for element property data by forward translators, etc. will have to
account for this inconsistent data. An easy way to identify these inconsistencies is to do a
“Modify” (with no changes) on each property set after the mapping is done. Any data consistency
problems will be flagged by Patran by an error or warning message.
Main Index
442 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
The property mapping capability provides access to the mapping process via a specified function.
This function is declared in the “Property Set Mapping Spreadsheet” in the cell to the right of the
cell containing “GENERAL FUNCTION”. If a general function is specified and it exists, it will
be called at several points in the process. Specifically, it is called at the beginning and end of the
entire property mapping process, at the beginning and end of each “source” property set and
following each “source” property word, provided that a “tag” has been specified. (The “tag” is
not required for the two calls at the beginning and end of the entire property mapping process.)
You’ll note in the “Property Set Mapping Spreadsheet” following each source and destination
property set pair are cells containing “Initial Property Set Function Tag” and “Final Property Set
Function Tag”. If data is entered in the cell to the right of the cell containing “Initial Property Set
Function Tag”, then when this specific source property set is encountered in the database, the
general function is called and is passed the current state add the specified tag.
This function can then perform whatever actions are required including calling back to the
“map_properties” class for current data on the property set in hand. (See below for a list of
available functions.) Note that if no “Point Mass” property sets exist in the database, this call will
not be made.
Likewise, if a “Property Word Function Tag” is provided and that source word is encountered,
the general function is called. Note that these tags are specified in the column to the right of the
“Destination Word” column in the “Property Mapping Spreadsheet”. Also note that “Property
Word Function Tags” can only be specified for “Source Words”.
7. Converting the Mapping Spreadsheet into a PCL Function
map_properties.create_final_map("CodeATypetoCodeBTypeProps
.xls",
"CodeATypetoCodeBTypeProps.pcl",”FunctName”)
Recall that Code A and Code B are the exact preference names (without spaces or decimals).
“FunctName” is the name of the function that will be called to do the property mapping.
For the ABAQUS to MARC Change, this command generates the PCL file,
“abatomarcprops.pcl” which contains the function “abatomarcprops.”
This function consists of the spreadsheet data loaded into pcl variables, which are then passed to
the element property mapping logic. This function needs to be compiled and made accessible to
Patran. The suggested location is the analysis plb, which in this case is “mscmarc.plb.”
The property mapping logic currently does not consider topology, linearity and directionality data.
Neither does it verify that materials mapped to laminate property sets are laminate materials. Further,
only the first DOF set value for each set of geometric, condensation, laminate, formulation options is
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 443
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
considered in the “Property Set Spreadsheets”. This could pose some problems for logic accessing the
mapped element property set data, such as forward translators.
Main Index
444 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
your function "my_mapping_class.go" could call the "normal" mapping functions for materials, element
properties, mpcs and job definitions. And call your own function for LBCs. Thus,
my_mapping_class.go
map_mscnastran_to_mscmarc.structural_materials ( )
map_mscnastran_to_mscmarc.structural_elmt_props ( )
map_mscnastran_to_mscmarc.structural_mpcs ( )
map_mscnastran_to_mscmarc.structural_job_definitions ( )
my_mapping_class.do_the_lbcs ( )
The logical place to make the call to "mscmarc_mapping.set_mapping_function" would be in the
p3epilog.pcl file. But this call can be made anytime before a preference change is made. In addition, the
user would have to compile and add their plb to the system, again, most likely in the p3epilog file.
A little used but useful place to install this code on an enterprise basis would be in the "init.pcl" function
in "p3_home", probably just before the call to "p3epilog.pcl".
Main Index
Preferences>Analysis 445
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
STRING state[ ]
STRING tag[ ]
SWITCH ( state )
CASE ( “Map Property Word” )
CASE ( “Start Region Set Mapping” )
CASE ( “End Region Set Mapping” )
CASE ( “Start Property Set Mapping” )
CASE ( “End Property Set Mapping” )
END SWITCH
END FUNCTION
Now lets do something practical. The Abaqus “Point Mass” property set allows a single quantity for
“Mass Magnitude”. The MSC.Marc “Mass – (MASS)” property set however defines mass in three
directions, “Transl Inertia, X”, “Transl Inertia, Y” and “Transl Inertia, Z”. Clearly when we map from
Abaqus to MSC.Marc, we want any “Mass Magnitude” to map to each of the three MSC.Marc property
words. Rather than handling this complexity in the “Property Mapping Spreadsheet”, we do it with the
general function.
Assume we have created a “Property Word Function Tag” for the “Mass Magnitude” property word in
the Abaqus “Point Mass” property set as described above. Our general function might look like the
following.
FUNCTION map_abaqus_elmt_props_to_mscmarc ( state, tag )
STRING state[ ]
STRING tag[ ]
INTEGER status
REAL mass
STRING word[32]
SWITCH ( state )
CASE ( “Map Property Word” )
SWITCH ( tag )
CASE ( “Translational Mass” )
$Recover the current “Mass Magnitude” value. We’re
$assuming it is a real value and not a field.
word = "Mass Magnitude"
status = map_properties.get_active_src_word_rval ( word, mass,
datatype,
field_id )
$status = 0, if word is valid, exists and defined
$status = 1, if word is valid, exists, but is not a real
$status = 2, if word is valid but doesn’t exist
$status = 3, if word is not valid for current property set
$status = 4, if a property set conversion is not active
IF( status == 0 ) THEN
$Create three MSC.Marc words using the Abaqus value
$Note that word definitions have to be specified exactly
$and they have to be valid for the destination property set.
Main Index
446 Preferences>Analysis
Selecting/Changing the Analysis Code and Type
Main Index
Preferences>Global 447
Controlling Global Operational Parameters
Main Index
448 Preferences>Global
Controlling Global Operational Parameters
Parameters defined in the Global Preferences dialog box affect operational characteristics and
geometric construction.
Session File Selects whether or not a session file will be saved. Options are to save
after Patran completes, delete after Patran completes, or to be
prompted as to whether or not to save the session file.
Enable Revert Operation Controls the use of the File>Revert command (see File>Revert, 71).
If ON, the revert operation will be enabled. This selection does not
have immediate consequences; to have it take effect, you must exit the
current work session then reopen the database.
Main Index
Preferences>Global 449
Controlling Global Operational Parameters
Warning Message Options Picks the type of feedback you receive whenever Patran needs to issue
a warning.
Main Index
450 Preferences>Graphics
Specifying Graphic Display Parameters
In the Graphics Preferences dialog box you can stipulate certain view settings, specify the colors used
for highlighting, and select the shape, color, and size of markers, used in some geometric and FEM
procedures (e.g., node equivalencing).
Main Index
Preferences>Graphics 451
Specifying Graphic Display Parameters
Main Index
452 Preferences>Mouse
Programming the Mouse for View Transformations
With the Mouse Preferences options you can program the middle mouse button to perform incremental
view transformation functions.
Main Index
Preferences>Mouse 453
Programming the Mouse for View Transformations
Middle Mouse Button Map All four functions can be programmed with different MMB / key
combinations simultaneously.
Rotate X/Y Rotates the view about the global or screen X and Y axes.
• About X
move the mouse up to rotate clockwise
move the mouse down to rotate counterclockwise.
• About Y
move the mouse right to rotate clockwise
move the mouse left to rotate counterclockwise.
Rotate Z Rotates the view about the global or screen Z axis.
move the mouse right to rotate clockwise
move the mouse left to rotate counterclockwise.
Pan X/Y Pans the view in the screen X or Y direction.
move the mouse left or right to pan left or right
move the mouse up or down to pan up or down.
Zoom Zoom the view of the model in (enlarge) or out (reduce).
move the mouse left to zoom in
move the mouse right to zoom out.
Transform in Wireframe If ON, view transformations are performed in wireframe even if the
model is rendered in shaded or hidden line mode.
Transform with Edges If ON, and the toggle above is OFF, view transformations are
performed in shaded mode and solid edges are shown.
Mouse Tracking This parameter is meaningful in hardware graphics mode only. If ON,
partial redraws will be created as rendering tries to catch up to the
mouse motion (in software graphics mode this happens
automatically).
Spin Model With the mouse button map set to one of the rotate functions, and this
toggle turned ON, you can spin the view of the model. When you press
the middle mouse button, the view will transform as expected, but you
can make it spin by releasing the button. The speed of rotation is
proportional to the speed with which you release the button.
Transformation Options Brings up a subordinate dialog box in which you can set the rotation
angle increment, pan factor and zoom factor.
Main Index
454 Preferences>Mouse
Programming the Mouse for View Transformations
Rotation Displays the rotation angle in degrees. Each mouse movement will
rotate the view by that increment.
Model/Screen Relative Selects whether the rotation axis specified is to be interpreted as a
global axis or a screen axis.
Pan Factor Displays the panning rate. Each mouse movement will move the view
of the model by that increment.
Zoom Factor Displays the zooming rate. Each mouse movement will zoom the view
of the model at that rate.
Main Index
Preferences>Picking 455
Parameters of Interactive Screen Picking
Many geometric and finite element operations require that you select one or several entities as the object
of some action. The Picking Preferences dialog box contains a variety of options for picking entities
with the mouse (for more information on interactive screen picking, see Screen Picking, 33).
Note: The selections you make in this dialog box will not take effect immediately. After selecting
the parameters, exit Patran. The choices you made will be saved in a file (settings.pcl) that
will activate the new parameter settings when you restart Patran.
Main Index
456 Preferences>Picking
Parameters of Interactive Screen Picking
Single Picking These options apply when you select single entities.
Centroid Picks the entity whose centroid is closest to the center of a “pick box”.
Entity Picks the entity at which the cursor is pointing.
Entity Picking Cursor In entity picking mode, selects the shape of the cursor. In centroid
picking mode the cursor always remains an arrow.
Rectangle/Polygon Picking These options apply when you select a number of entities at the same
(Multiple) time.
Enclose entire entity An entity is selected only if it is totally inside the selection rectangle
or polygon.
Enclose any portion of An entity is selected even if it is only partially inside the selection
entity rectangle or polygon.
Main Index
Preferences>Picking 457
Parameters of Interactive Screen Picking
Enclose centroid An entity is selected only if its centroid is inside the selection
rectangle or polygon.
Cycle picking form In entity picking mode:
lists the names of two or more entities that overlap at the place
the cursor is touching. You can then accept the highlighted
selection, or pick the entity you wanted to target.
lists all entities whose centroid lies near the point where the
cursor is touching.
Horizontal Select Menus If ON, the Select Menu (Picking Filters) will be horizontally placed.
Note that this is one of those parameters that will take effect only in
the next Patran work session.
Show Picking Icons If ON, the Select Menu will contain the icons to add, reject, and
replace a selection whenever a screen picking option is evoked.
Preselection Settings These options control the highlighting of entities prior to selection as
the cursor passes over them.
Label Highlighting If ON, entity labels will be highlighted along with the entities.
Entity Highlighting If ON, entities will be highlighted as the cursor passes over them.
Node/Point Marker Size Controls the size of the marker that is highlighted when the cursor
passes over a point or a node.
Main Index
458 Preferences>Report
Formats of Numerical Entries in Analysis Result Reports
The Preferences>Report command controls the format of numerical entries in reports that output finite
element analysis results.
Real Numbers
Floating Point Outputs result data in floating point format.
Scientific Notation Outputs result data in scientific notation format.
Field Width Selects the width of the numeric field. This size must accommodate
all digits and the decimal point. In scientific notation the field width
takes on the maximum value.
Number of Decimals Defines the number of decimal digits in a numerical entry. In
scientific notation format, this number defaults to the maximum
value.
Integers Selects the number of integers the numerical entries may contain in
the tabular output.
Spacing Selects the number of spaces between numerical entries in the tabular
output.
Main Index
Preferences>Geometry 459
Parameters for Representing Geometric Entities
With the Geometry Preferences options you can specify the way parameterized curves and surfaces are
represented in the database. These preferences apply to geometry imported from an external source, as
well as to geometry created in the Patran system.
Exportable to Neutral File If ON, curves, surfaces, and solids will be created as parametric cubic
geometry.
Solid Origin Location With the options in this category, you can select the method by which
left-handed parameterization created by some hyperpatch construct or
transform methods is changed to right-handed parameterization.
This selection is important only when you are running session files (see
Session File, 46), because the hyperpatch origin location must be set
according to whether the session file came from Patran or PATRAN 2.
Patran The origin location will be determined according to Patran convention.
PATRAN 2 The origin location will be determined according to PATRAN 2
convention.
Main Index
460 Preferences>Geometry
Parameters for Representing Geometric Entities
Solid Property Assignment Default OFF. Controls the inheritance of property sets by
Inherit From Parent new/modified solid geometry created from existing solids. Whenever
new solids are created, this setting will be used to determine if property
sets should be assigned. The following rule will be applied for those
solid creation operations where existing solids are used. If the
preference is On and the original solid has a property set assigned, this
property set will be assigned to the new/modified solids. Otherwise,
no property set will be assigned to the new/modified solids. The
following solid editing operations are
affected:Geometry/Edit/Solid/Break|Blend|Refit|Boolean|
EdgeBlend|Chamfer|Imprint|Shell
NURBS Accelerator If ON (default), NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) curves and
surfaces will be converted to piecewise polynomials without
introducing any approximations. This format accelerates evaluation of
geometry and provides increased performance.
Auto Update Solid If ON (default), the mesh, loads, and boundary conditions applied on a
Mesh/LBC solid model will automatically update after you performed a Boolean
operation or other editing applications, namely edge blend, imprint, or
shelling.
If you turn this parameter OFF, the update action becomes a selectable
item in the Geometry>Edit>Solid command dialog boxes for the
above editing functions.
Geometry Scale Factor Because the model unit of Parasolid geometry is meter, a scale factor
is applied to Patran geometric extents so that they can be expressed in
the appropriate Parasolid dimensions. The default scale factor is 39.37,
the equivalent of one meter in inches. Other possible scale factors are:
Main Index
Preferences>Finite Element 461
Setting FEM Parameters
Main Index
462 Preferences>Finite Element
Setting FEM Parameters
Several parameters are defined in the Preferences>FEM dialog box. They are described in the table
below.
Main Index
Preferences>Finite Element 463
Setting FEM Parameters
Node/Edge Snap Angle Controls the angle that determines whether a node will snap to a vertex
where the slope of a composite edge changes. If the angle of the slope
is greater than the specified edge snap angle, a node will snap to the
vertex when you create a mesh seed or a mesh. If, however, the angle
of the slope is less than the snap angle, no node will snap to this vertex.
You may realize that you need to change the Node/Edge Snap Angle
value after you have created a mesh seed on a composite edge and
discovered that no control point was placed on the vertex. If it is
important that a node be located there, you can invoke the
Preferences>FEM command and change the Node/Edge Snap Angle
so that it becomes less than the slope angle. When you press the Apply
button, the following will appear:
Select Yes and a mesh seed control point will snap to the vertex and the
mesh seed will be adjusted along the entire edge.
DFEM Field Equivalence Specifies which values of discrete FEM fields, that associate loads and
Options boundary conditions (LBCs) with nodes, will be associated with a
node that “survived” after coincident nodes have been equivalenced in
the finite element model.
Main Index
464 Preferences>Finite Element
Setting FEM Parameters
Displace Presents various options for associating displacement values with the
surviving node.
• Use Retained--use the value associated with the node retained after
equivalencing.
• Add--use the sum of the values associated with each of the
equivalenced nodes.
• Use Deleted--use the value associated with the node that was
deleted during the equivalencing process.
Vector Presents the same options for associating vector (e.g., force) values
with the node that survived the equivalencing process
Scalar Presents various options for associating scalar values (pressures and
temperatures) with the node that survived the equivalencing process.
In addition to those already seen for vector field values, the option
exists to use the average of the two scalar values associated to the
equivalenced nodes.
Preference Specific Verify Specifies whether analysis code specific element verification
parameters should be used in the Elements/Verify forms. Currently
this value is on by default for MD Nastran and off by default for all
other analysis codes.
Enable Pseudo Surface Specifies whether pseudo-surface tool icons will be displayed on the
ASM Finite Elements/Create/Mesh/Advanced Mesh form. The tools are
used to convert between tessellated surfaces and pseudo-surfaces, to
stitch gaps in pseudo-surfaces, and to edit pseudo-surfaces.
Geometry/FEM LBC These parameters affect how Geometry to FEM association is
Association processed for LBCs. Each of these settings is saved in the database and
are restored each time the database is opened.
Main Index
Preferences>Finite Element 465
Setting FEM Parameters
Main Index
466 Preferences>Finite Element
Setting FEM Parameters
Check Adjacent Geometry This checkbox specifies whether adjacent geometry is checked when
associating LBCs to FEM that were applied to Geometry. Patran
always uses the node to geometry association determined by the
mesher to associate LBCs to element faces and edges. When adjacent
solids or surfaces have overlapping or duplicate faces or edges, an
element may be associated to one piece of geometry but some of its
nodes may be associated to an adjacent geometry. When this check is
turned on, element nodes associated to the adjacent geometry are
included in the LBC evaluation.
During a create or modify operation, angle checks are done, and upon
failure an attempt is made to find the correct elements that will satisfy
the angle check.
Main Index
Preferences>Main Form 467
Controlling the Appearance of the Main Form
On UNIX platforms, the Preferences>Main Form options enable you to change the layout and
appearance of the Main form. The changes will not take effect until you restart Patran
Close
Add Latest History Line Adds latest history line to be written at top of history list (history lines
scroll down). Defaults ON and allows last history line to be viewed
above viewport in default orientation. If using history list to enter PCL
commands or debug PCL functions, you may want to turn this OFF.
Latest history line will be displayed at bottom of history window and
will scroll up.
Popup Applications Switch Causes application switch to be removed from Main form (allowing a
larger viewport) and displayed as a popup. As a default, this is mapped
to the right mouse button and can be activated by clicking almost
anywhere in a Patran form or in the history list on the Main form. This
will not activate with the cursor on the menu bar, the toolbar, on an
icon or in a select databox. Try several locations to see the best places
for using this option.
Small Screen Layout Causes initial orientation of Main form and viewport to fit better on a
small computer screen so that forms do not extend off the screen.
Save Visible History Line Allows any changes made during the current session to the vertical
Count height of the main form to be saved between sessions (Default is ON).
If turned OFF, the next session will startup ignoring any main form
height changes made during the present session.
Main Index
468 Preferences>Main Form
Controlling the Appearance of the Main Form
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools Patran Reference Manual
10 Tools
Tools Concepts and Definitions 470
The Tools Menu 479
Tools Commands 481
Main Index
470 Patran Reference Manual
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Lists
A list is a convenient way of referencing a number of entities for input in commands that accommodate
multiple entity selection. When you use a list, the listed entities are picked directly from the database,
rather than being cursor-selected in the graphics window.
Lists can be created of entities that either share some common attribute or are associated with a common
entity. For instance, an attribute-based list may contain elements that have the same material properties,
while an association-based list may be generated of nodes that are all located on the same edge.
An example where a list can be useful may be a finite element model in which you want to apply a nodal
displacement constraint to all nodes whose global x-coordinate is 2.0. Instead of picking a potentially
large number of nodes in the FEM application, you can first create a list to include the nodes that fit the
attribute criterion, then use the list for the constraint assignment.
Entity Types
Lists may contain either geometric or finite element entities.
Classification Methods
The criteria that determine an entity’s inclusion in a list may be attribute or association.
Attribute
The Attribute method identifies a distinctive characteristic that is shared by all members of the list. In the
FEM application, a list of elements may be based on common element properties, material properties, or
analysis results (fringe values), and for a node list you can specify coordinate values as well as fringe
values. For a geometry list, on the other hand, you must cursor-select entities or enter their IDs, because
the list generator does not recognize any attributes that are common for geometric entities.
Association
With this method you can list a number of entities that are associated with one common entity or group.
For example, you may specify that the list include those geometric entities, e.g., points, that are located
at the same vertex, or on the same edge or face. The list of FEM entities, such as nodes, may be based
either on their association with a geometric entity (e.g., vertex) or a group, or with an FE entity, for
example an element edge.
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools 471
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Group Assignment
After you created a list, you can associate its members with an existing group or, alternately, assign them
to a newly created group.
Boolean Operations
You can create several lists and combine them, two at a time, into one comprehensive list, with one of
the Boolean operations:
• Union--outputs a resultant list that contains all members of list A plus all members of list B.
• Subtraction--outputs a resultant list obtained by subtracting the contents of one list from the
contents of another list.
• Intersection--outputs a resultant list obtained by finding members that are common to both list A
and list B.
Using Lists
List names are entered enclosed in single quotes (‘), because the list names (lista, listb, and listc) are
global PCL string variables and require special delimiters so that the List Processor can recognize them.
Mass Properties
The Patran Mass Properties module is a tool with which you can calculate the mass properties of
geometric and finite element models. The process may be applied to an entire model or to any of its
subregions. For an overview of the theoretical background of mass properties calculations, see Summary
of Mass Properties, 762.
The following mass properties are calculated and, if applicable, their symbols displayed:
• mass and volume
• center of gravity (CG)
• inertia tensor at the origin of the reference frame
Main Index
472 Patran Reference Manual
Tools Concepts and Definitions
The principal directions at the center of gravity may be presented in three different forms:
• Three orthogonal unit vectors.
• A triad of space-fixed rotation angles γ, β, α that rotate a reference frame into the principal
inertia frame.
In space-fixed rotation the coordinate frame in which the rotation takes place remains fixed.
The rotation angles represent a 3-2-1 (Z-Y-X) sequence.
The principal frame is obtained by the following rotations:
about the Z-axis by γ degrees
• about the original Y-axis by β degrees
• about the original X-axis by α degrees.
The X axis of the principal inertia frame corresponds to the largest principal inertia, and the
Y axis, to the next largest.
• A triad of body-fixed rotation angles ( γ, β, α ) in a 3-1-3 (Z-X-Z) sequence.
In body-fixed rotation the coordinate frame in which the rotation takes place moves with each
prescribed rotation.
The principal frame is obtained by the following rotations:
about the Z axis by γ degrees
about the newly positioned X axis by β degrees
• about the newly positioned Z axis by α degrees.
Where applicable, mass properties are calculated in both the reference Cartesian coordinate frame and in
a user-specified coordinate frame.
Output Options
For the results output of the mass properties calculations, you can request that Patran do one or all of the
following:
• plot the principal axes at the center of gravity
• create a coordinate frame aligned with the principal axes of inertia
• write the results to a mass properties report file.
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools 473
Tools Concepts and Definitions
The principal axes are plotted in proportion to the magnitudes of the radii of gyration of the
corresponding principal inertias, as shown:
The newly created principal inertia coordinate frames will be assigned a coordinate frame ID that is the
next available in the database.
Report Files
Mass Properties report files are written in standard Patran report file format. In addition to mass
properties calculation results, these reports also list all included entities and all rejected entities.
Units
Mass properties are generated in units consistent with those used in the referenced geometry, element
properties, and material properties.
Main Index
474 Patran Reference Manual
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Mass property calculations are based on the assumption that all beam and shell element offsets, as well
as concentrated mass offsets, are zero. If an entity with an offset is referenced, a warning message will
appear.
Weight Factors
Mass properties of shell elements are calculated by treating the thickness as a weighting factor and
assuming that all mass lies in the surface of the shell. Similarly, when calculating the mass properties of
beam elements, the cross-sectional area enters as a weighting factor with all mass assumed to lie in the
locus of the one-dimensional beam.
Consequently, mass properties calculated for these entities will be slightly different from those calculated
for corresponding 3D solids.
Three-dimensional Models
With this default option, you can calculate mass properties for all entity types (0D, 1D, 2D, and 3D).
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools 475
Tools Concepts and Definitions
The “2D Axisymmetric” option cannot be used to calculate mass properties of non-axisymmetric cyclic-
symmetry models. These are treated as 3D models. Their mass properties will be calculated for the model
only, not for the entire structure that would be generated by prescribed rotational and reflective
transformations.
Beam Library
Beam elements can be defined with a variety of cross sections. The beam library offers a number of
standard shapes as well as a means of defining your own “arbitrary” cross sections. In either case, you
can request that the dimensioned profile and its calculated section properties be shown after you have
entered all required dimensions or point coordinates. Optionally, you can also output a report file that
contains all boundary information.
Standard Shapes
Industry standard beam cross sections are presented in a tabular form; after you select an item, the
enlarged shape and its required dimensions will be displayed.
Main Index
476 Patran Reference Manual
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Standard-shaped cross sections may be constant or vary along the length of the beam. To create variable
sections, you must use one or more spatial fields for dimensions, as well as provide a location for
evaluation along the length of the beam. This may be defined either with XYZ coordinates or with a
parametric function.
Arbitrary Shapes
In addition to standard cross-sectional profiles, you can also create your own specific non-standard beam
cross sections by generating arbitrary boundary contours. A boundary must be a closed loop that consists
of straight line segments. The cross section may contain holes; these are generated by adding inner
boundaries to the shape definition. Because the first loop defines the outer boundary, all subsequent loops
must be located within the area enclosed by the first loop.
To define the cross section, you can
• enter a series of input point coordinates
• select a surface whose outline will be approximated by the boundary
• provide a file from which the point coordinates may be selected.
Using a Surface
The arbitrary cross section is created by tracing the outline of an existing surface. The surface may be a
trimmed surface but not with any degenerated edges or duplicate edges. A number of points are sampled
on the surface boundary and their coordinates are placed in the spreadsheet. If the surface contains mesh
seeds, the points are sampled at the seeds.
Reading a File
The boundary is drawn utilizing points whose coordinates are contained in a file. To be able to read the
data and generate the profile, the format of the referenced file must be the same as the format of a Report
File that captures the point data of a manually created cross section.
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools 477
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Unlike Groups, where the entire entity must be in the group, Named Regions can be defined with only
portions of the entity defined such as the faces of a solid element or the edges of solid geometric entities.
Design Studies
A design study is a named event in which you specify the following:
• the objective of the design study and of optimization--what do you want to achieve through
multiple iterations of the analysis process? Although there may be a number of possible
objectives, in the majority of structural analysis problems the objective of optimization is to
minimize the weight of the model.
• the parameters of the model--which dimensions or properties may vary in order to achieve the
optimal design?
• the constraints placed on the design study--what condition is a limiting factor in the optimization
process? For example, in the plane stress problem cited before, as the plate thickness is reduced
to decrease the weight, the thickness value must not become so small as to cause the plate to
deform beyond a given acceptable limit.
Variables
Variables are those parameters, or properties, whose magnitude will be modified in the process of
studying the solutions that can improve the design. The variable may be some dimension, an element
property (e.g., plate thickness, beam cross-section), or a material property. To perform studies for the
purpose of improving and optimizing a design through iterative solutions, you must parameterize the
model, that is, identify and label variables and set up possible relationships between them.
When you define a model variable, a corresponding field may be created as well. This field is a linear
function of the variable and it becomes available throughout Patran. Thus, if desired, it can be used to
define additional model properties. Any changes made to the variable will also change the properties
dependent on the field.
Main Index
478 Patran Reference Manual
Tools Concepts and Definitions
Results Templates
Results Templates provide a convenient means of storing in the database collections of settings that you
can use to create plots, graphs and reports under the Results menu. Settings stored in Results Templates
are applied to the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options menu settings for the following results
tools: Deformation Plot, Fringe Plot, Marker Vector Plot, Marker Tensor Plot, Graph, and Report.
Rebar Definitions
With the Rebar Definitions application you can create and display Abaqus beam shapes in Patran
MSC.Fatigue
The MSC.Fatigue software application integrates finite element analysis and fatigue life estimation
techniques to perform fatigue calculations. Analysis results output includes full-color life contour plots
to provide rapid assessment of fatigue in critical areas. This selection only appears in the Tools pulldown
menu if a license is available.
Random Analysis
Random Analysis is a random analysis software package used with MD Nastran and Patran. It was
developed by field engineers at MSC.Software to offer a fast, integrated random analysis solution and all
of Random Analysis’s analysis capabilities and generated results are available from within the Patran
environment. To use this capability a software license must be available.
MSC.Laminate Modeler
The MSC.Laminate Modeler application aids the design, analysis, and manufacture of laminated
composite structures. It integrates various methods of simulating the manufacturing process (including
draping of fabrics) with simplified, more efficient ways of storing and manipulating data required for the
analysis of composite materials. This selection appears only if a license is available.
Analysis Manager
The Patran Analysis Manager provides convenient and automatic means to submit, monitor, control, and
perform all other management tasks required by analysis jobs running either locally or on remote
networked systems. This option is only selectable if a license is available.
Main Index
Ch. 10: Tools 479
The Tools Menu
Menu Conventions
A menu item with ellipses (...) attached to it calls up an additional dialog box in which you enter further
data.
Main Index
480 Patran Reference Manual
The Tools Menu
List Creates and manipulates lists with which you can reference a number
of entities for input in commands that accommodate multiple entity
selection.
Mass Properties Calculates mass properties either of entire geometric and finite
element models or of their subregions. Displays graphic symbols
related to mass properties and outputs report files and summary
spreadsheets.
Beam Library Creates and manages dimensioned cross section shapes to be
associated with beam elements. Calculates section properties for any
selected beam cross section.
Regions Creates named application regions for use in most places where
application regions (collections of entities) are requiered.
Model Variables Creates and manages variable parameters to be used in design studies
and design optimization.
Design Study Creates and manages design study cases in which the functions
necessary for design optimization are defined.
MSC.Fatigue Invokes the MSC.Fatigue application module if licensed and installed.
Results Templates Creates and manages templates that store collections of settings for
displaying, plotting and reporting analysis results.
Results Plot Sets Creates and manages templates that store collections of settings for
displaying, plotting and reporting analysis results.
Rebar Definitions Creates and displays Abaqus beam shapes in Patran.
MSC.Laminate Modeler Implements the MSC.Laminate Modeler application if licensed and
installed.
Properties Import Properties Import maintains material and property names when
reading results into Patran.
Analysis Manager Calls up the Patran Analysis Manager if licensed and installed.
Rotor Dynamics Opens the Rotor Dynamics form. Only available when MD Nastran is
set as the analysis type.
Experimental Data Fitting Used to curve fit experimentally derived raw elastomeric material data
and fit a number of material models to the data.
Bolt Preload Easily create simulated bolts with this tool for use in Nastran and Marc
analyses.
Feature Recognition Automatically and interactively recognize geometric features such as
holes, chamfers, and blend. Show, edit, and delete these features as
necessary.
Pre Release Provides access to pre-release capabilities in Patran.
Main Index
Tools>List>Create 481
Tools Commands
The Tools>List process provides access to the commands with which you can generate and manipulate
lists.
Creating Lists
With the List>Create dialog box you establish a “pick list” of entities. The criteria for inclusion in the
list may be a common attribute that the entities possess (e.g., elements that have the same material
properties), or the association of the listed entities with one common entity (e.g., elements that are on the
same face).
Lists by Attributes
The nature of attributes that may be ascribed to entities depend primarily on whether they are geometric
or FEM entities.
Main Index
482 Tools>List>Create
Creating Lists
Geometric Entities
For the purposes of lists, the only attribute of geometric entities is that they can be selected, either with
the cursor or by entering their names and ID numbers.
Main Index
Tools>List>Create 483
Creating Lists
Model Specifies the model definition, Geometry or FEM, that defines the
type of selectable objects.
Object Identifies the entity types to be include in the list. The entity
designations displayed when you press this button depend on the
Model type you selected.
Method Selects the criteria by which an entity’s inclusion in the list will be
determined (Attribute or Association).
Main Index
484 Tools>List>Create
Creating Lists
Attribute Names the possible common attributes that determine which entities
will be included in the list.
In cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames the tolerance values will be in degrees.
Main Index
Tools>List>Create 485
Creating Lists
Tolerance
Enter a value (or accept the default) that determines how close the actual coordinate value or fringe value
must be to the specified range values so that the entity will be included in a list. For example, if the node
fringe value attribute is temperature, and the range is specified as F> 300 and Tol= 5, the list will include
all nodes for which the actual temperature result value was 295 degrees or higher.
Properties
If you are creating a list based on Property Set (element properties) or Material attributes, the dialog
box will contain the “Existing Property Sets” or “Existing Materials” textbox with the names of
previously defined element property sets or material properties. Pick the property set or material of
Main Index
486 Tools>List>Create
Creating Lists
interest. When you press the Apply button, the list will comprise all elements to which the selected
properties or material is assigned.
A filtering mechanism helps you reduce a potentially long list by entering one or more letters of the name
of the desired property set.
Lists by Association
Association also depends on the nature of entities selected for the list. Geometric entities may be
associated with other geometric entities, whereas FEM entities may be associated either with other FEM
entities (e.g., nodes associated with the same element) or with geometric entities (e.g., nodes associated
with the same edge).
Main Index
Tools>List>Create 487
Creating Lists
Target List
The list assembled in the List>Create dialog box will be entered in a List A or an identical List B form.
The listed entities may now be saved in the database as a group, added to another group, input into a select
databox in an application dialog box, or highlighted on the screen.
‘lista’ contents: Displays the list that resulted from the List>Create operation. The
contents of this textbox are not editable.
Add to Group Creates a new group for the listed entities or adds them to an existing
group.
Remove from Group Removes listed entities from a group.
Highlight Highlights listed entities on the screen.
Clear Removes all listed entities from the contents box.
Previous Restores the contents of the textbox to what it was before the current
list was applied.
Main Index
488 Tools>List>Boolean
Boolean Operations on Lists
With the Tools>List>Boolean command sequence you can combine two lists into one, using Boolean
operations.
• Union--outputs a resultant list that contains all members of list A plus all members of list B.
• Subtraction--outputs a resultant list obtained by subtracting the contents of one list from the
contents of another list.
Main Index
Tools>List>Boolean 489
Boolean Operations on Lists
• Intersection--outputs a resultant list obtained by finding members that are common to both list A
and list B.
‘listc’ Contents Displays the list that resulted from the Boolean operation.
Clear Removes all listed entities from the contents box.
Add to Group Creates a new group for the listed entities or adds them to an existing
group.
Remove from Group Removes listed entities from a group.
Replace A Transfers the contents of List C to List A.
Replace B Transfers the contents of List C to List B
Highlight Highlights listed entities on the screen.
Main Index
490 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
The Tools>Mass Properties application enables you to calculate the mass properties of two-or three-
dimensional geometric and finite element models. The calculations extend to entire models or any of their
subregions.
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 491
Calculating Mass Properties
The numerical results of mass properties calculations are output in a spreadsheet along with an optional
graphic display of certain related symbols, such as the principal axes in the center of gravity. In addition,
you can request that the results be written in a formatted report file.
Main Index
492 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 493
Calculating Mass Properties
Region Specifies the region for which mass properties calculations will apply.
Main Index
494 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
Include Specifies the type of entities that can be included in the selected
region. Inclusion options are:
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 495
Calculating Mass Properties
Main Index
496 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
summary spreadsheet, except that three rows of X,Y, Z components are now displayed for each group.
The name of the group is shown in the first column of the first row that contains information of that group.
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 497
Calculating Mass Properties
For FEM entities, this spreadsheet will also contain additional columns to accommodate element
properties, such as element thickness, cross-sectional area, bar length, and property type. The N/A entry
in a cell indicates that the property is not applicable to that element (e.g., bar length for a plate element).
Main Index
498 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
Principal Directions in • Columns 1-3 - three mutually orthogonal principal direction unit
User-Specified Frame vectors at the CG, given in a user-specified coordinate frame in the
order of decreasing principal inertias;
• Column 5 - triad of 3-2-1 space fixed angles (see also on Mass
Properties, 471) that rotate a user-specified coordinate frame into
the principal inertia frame at the CG;
• Column 6 - the triad of 3-1-3 body-fixed angles (see also on Mass
Properties, 471) that rotate the user-specified frame into the
principal inertia frame at the CG.
Principal Directions in Ref. • Columns 1-3 - three mutually orthogonal principal direction unit
Cartesian Frame vectors at the CG, given in the reference Cartesian frame in the
order of decreasing principal inertias;
• Column 5 - triad of 3-2-1 space-fixed angles (see Mass Properties,
471) that rotate the reference Cartesian frame into the principal
inertia frame at the CG;
• Column 6 - triad of 3-1-3 body-fixed angles (see Mass Properties,
471) that rotate the reference Cartesian frame into the principal
inertia frame at the CG.
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 499
Calculating Mass Properties
2. Click the Write To Report File toggle and the Report File form will be displayed. Initially only
the left-side portion of the form will be active.
3. Select the appropriate folder and enter a name for the report file. Be sure that the .rpt extension is
included.
4. Press Apply, and the right-hand side of the form will now become selectable.
5. Pick Mass Properties in the Report Contents list and press Apply. The report file will be written.
If you haven’t completed all input required for mass properties calculations, skip step 5, return to the
Mass Properties dialog box, perform whatever needs to be done. Press Apply to write the report.
Main Index
500 Tools>Mass Properties
Calculating Mass Properties
To create a new report file (and close the one that is open), select File>Report and the Report File form
will be redisplayed. Follow steps 3-5 for creating a new report file.
You can find and read your report files in the Notepad application.
Center of Gravity
Center of Gravity coordinates are presented in Cartesian, as well as in a user-defined coordinate frame.
Inertia Tensor at CG
These inertia tensor components, in both the Cartesian and a user-defined coordinate frame, are given at
the center of gravity.
Main Index
Tools>Mass Properties 501
Calculating Mass Properties
Rotation Angles
Space-fixed and body-fixed rotational angles (see Mass Properties, 471) are given in the Cartesian as
well as in a user-defined coordinate frame.
Main Index
502 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Using the beam library, you can select among a number of dimensioned standard beam cross sections or
define a new “arbitrary” cross-sectional shape. Once you have supplied the necessary dimensions for a
standard cross section--or sufficient information for an arbitrary shape-- you can request that the
dimensioned profile and its calculated section properties be shown. Optionally, you can also output a
report file that contains all boundary and section property information.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 503
Using the Beam Library
Main Index
504 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Shape Symbols Shows the standard shape symbols. To browse through all the shapes,
press one of the arrows and the next (or previous) panel will be
displayed.
For a standard cross section, select one of the profiles. Its outline and
required dimensions will appear on the right side of the form. Fill in
all dimensions.
Spatial Scalar Fields Lists the name of existing spatial fields that you may apply for one or
more dimensions if the cross section varies along the length of the
beam.
Calculate/Display Displays the dimensioned cross section along with calculated section
properties and symbols.
Write to Report File Outputs section properties to a formatted report file.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 505
Using the Beam Library
Main Index
506 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Spatial Scalar Fields Lists the name of existing spatial fields that you
may apply for one or more dimensions if the cross
section varies along the length of the beam. To
enter the field value, first click in the dimension
databox then pick the field name.
Location Specification Options:
Select an Entity and a Parametric Location (C1) Evaluates the variable dimension at a parametric
location of the beam. Move the slider to the
appropriate position between End A (0.000) and
End B (1.000).
Specify an XYZ Coordinate Specify an XYZ Coordinate
Select a Beam or Curve Identifies the beam element, curve, or edge along
which the cross section varies. Click in the
or textbox and select the entity or enter its ID.
Coordinate If you picked the Specify an XYZ Coordinate
option, the textbox heading changes to
Coordinate. Enter the coordinates of the location
where the cross section is to be evaluated.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 507
Using the Beam Library
In the Beam Library dialog box, next to Object, click the button marked Standard Shape to reveal the
other option of Arbitrary Shape. Notice that the dialog box form will change; the symbols of standard
shapes will be gone and the right side of the form will contain several new input items.
Main Index
508 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Loop Shows the number of the loop that you are generating. Loop 1 is the
outer loop, any subsequent loops are inner loops that define holes in
the profile. Up to eight loops may be created.
Insert Row/ To insert a new row of data into the spreadsheet, select the row below
where the new row will be placed and press Insert Row. The row
Delete Row above it will become available for data input.
To delete a row from the spreadsheet, select the row and click the
Delete Row button.
Clear Boundary Deletes all input from the spreadsheet.
Display Boundary Draws the boundary loops. Loop points are numbered according to the
spreadsheet input.
Rotate/ Angle Rotates the points on all loops about point 1 of the outer loop by the
angle you enter in the Angle databox.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 509
Using the Beam Library
Because the loops of the cross-sectional boundary must consist of straight line segments, if a reference
surface has curved edges these will be substituted by straight lines. The deviation between a curved
segment and a straight line segment is called “allowable curvature error”; its default value is 0.05.
The endpoint coordinates of the line segments will be recorded in the spreadsheet as the boundary input
points. For a closer approximation--and a larger number of points--decrease the value of the curvature
error.
Once the data has been entered, there is no further connection between the surface and the section,
consequently you can edit the point coordinates as desired (e.g., round them up or down).
If the reference surface lies in the global XY, YZ, or XZ plane, the orientation of its boundary loops will
be defined in Coordinate Frame 0. If it is not in any principal plane, a temporary plane and coordinate
frame will be created as the edge points are recorded.
Main Index
510 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
The two numbers in each line of the boundary loops data represent the X and Y coordinates of a point,
these will be entered into the spreadsheet. A blank line ends the loop. If there are several loops, each is
delimited by blank lines.
The “Stress Recovery Points” heading is followed by a line with up to four numbers that identify the
stress recovery points. The numbers correspond to the boundary loop points as they appear in the point
list starting with the first line (1) and not counting blank lines.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 511
Using the Beam Library
5. When you press Calculate/Display, the profile will be drawn and the stress recovery points will
be labeled with the appropriate letters.
Main Index
512 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
end point of the previous branch it is sometimes necessary to overlap branches. When this is required,
you enter a zero thickness for the overlapping branch.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 513
Using the Beam Library
Insert Branch/ To insert a new branch into the spreadsheet, select the branch below
where the new branch will be placed and press Insert Branch. The
Delete Branch branch above it will become available for data input.
To delete a branch from the spreadsheet, select the branch and click
the Delete Branch button.
Clear Branch Deletes all input from the spreadsheet.
Display Branches Draws the branches. Branches are numbered according to the
spreadsheet input.
Curvature Error The allowable Curvature Error will determine the number of straight
line segments used to approximate a curve.
You can define arbitrary sections with the Centerline method, press the Display Boundary button, and
then change the Method to Boundary Loops. The arbitrary shape from the centerline definition is also
stored as boundary loop data. At this point, if you press the Apply button, the beam section will be stored
as Boundary Loop arbitrary section as opposed to centerline data. Thus the centerline data can be used
directly in an MSC.Marc or MD Nastran analysis, or can be converted to boundary loops and used in
other analysis code including MSC.Marc if property values are accepted and input.
Main Index
514 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
other analysis codes that accept section properties can use this section. In this case the Centerline method
was used out of convenience if defining the section.
X Y t
1b 0 0 1
1e 10 0 2
2b 10 0 0
2e 5 0 0
3b 5 0 3
3e 5 10 1
The second example is a D section with curvature. The X, Y, dx/ds, dy/ds and thickness values are
tabularized at the side of the plot. Two branches are defined. The slopes of the first branch are opposite
each other, thus indicating to the program a curvature for this branch. The D section looks bad when using
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 515
Using the Beam Library
the default curvature error. If you reduce this to say, 0.02 instead of the default 0.05, the D section looks
much better as shown below.
X Y t dx dy
1b 0 0 0.1 1 0
1e 0 1 0.1 -1 0
2b 0 1 0.1 0 -1
2e 0 0 0.1 0 -1
Main Index
516 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 517
Using the Beam Library
Main Index
518 Tools>Beam Library
Using the Beam Library
Existing Sections Lists existing cross sections. Select the one you want to change.
Rename Section As Displays textbox for entering a new name.
Section Symbols Shows cross section symbols. Pick the section you want to use to
replace the existing one.
Section Dimensions Displays existing dimensions. Edit dimensions as desired.
Main Index
Tools>Beam Library 519
Using the Beam Library
Spatial Scalar Fields Lists existing fields. To associate a dimension with a field, click in the
dimension databox then pick the field name.
Location Specification Modifies the location where the field value will be evaluated. Enter
Options new coordinates, or select a new curve or beam element and move the
slider to define a new parametric location.
Existing Sections Lists existing beam cross sections. Pick the section(s) you want to
delete.
Sections to Delete Displays the name of the cross section(s) you selected for deletion.
Apply Deletes the selected cross section(s) and remains in the Beam Library
application
Cancel Cancels the delete action and exits the Beam Library application.
Main Index
520 Tools>Regions
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Named Regions are collections of entities that can be used as application regions for Loads and Boundary
Conditions as well as Element Properties. They are general like Groups, but differ in that they are not
used for display purposed and are restricted (like Application Regions) in that they can only contain one
topology type (1D, 2D, 3D). Some Applications, such as CATIA import, will automatically create these
named Regions making them a convenient way to define LBC or Element Property application regions.
Main Index
Tools>Regions 521
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
522 Tools>Regions
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Once a named Region is created it can be used on the Select Application Region form of a Load and
Boundary Condition or Element Property Set and in other select areas of Patran.
3D Entity Select
Element E
2D Entity Select
Main Index
Tools>Regions 523
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
524 Tools>Regions
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 525
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Model variables provide the foundation for design studies. They are the parameters, or properties, whose
magnitude will be modified in the process of performing iterative solutions. A variable may be a
dimension value, an element property (e.g., plate thickness), or a material property.
Main Index
526 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Values as Variables
Action Lists the action that can be performed. In addition to creating new
variables, you can also show (verify), modify, and delete existing
variables.
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 527
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Analysis Value Shows the initial value of the variable. Enter a real, scalar number.
Create Referencing Field If ON, creates a field for the model variable.
Main Index
528 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 529
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Description Provides a space where you can describe the nature of the variable. If
no description is entered, Patran will create a description; it specifies
the names of the Property Set and Property Name from which the
variable was created.
Analysis Value Shows the initial value of the variable. Enter a real, scalar number.
Dimension These two entries act together as a filter that facilitates finding the
element property that will be designated as the variable. The search
Type will be limited to the properties associated with those elements for
which the named dimensionality and type apply.
Select Property Set Lists the names of the Property Sets defined for the designated
element type. Pick the set that contains the property you wish to
parameterize.
Select Psets by Elements Selects a Property Set associated with an element you pick on the
screen (this can be helpful if you do not remember the pairing of
property sets and elements).
Select Property Name Displays a specific property contained in the named Property Set.
Main Index
530 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 531
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Description Provides a space where you can describe the nature of the variable. If
no description is entered, Patran will create a description; it will
identify the name of the element property set and specific element
property (e.g., Thickness) from which the variable was created.
Analysis Value Shows the initial value of the variable. Enter a real, scalar number.
Type This entry acts as a filter that facilitates finding the beam section for
which the variable is applied. The beam library will be searched for the
specified beam cross section type.
Select Beam Section Lists the names of previously defined beam cross sections. Pick the
one that contains the property you wish to parameterize.
Select Beams by Elements Selects a beam cross section associated with an element you pick on
the screen (this can be helpful if several beam elements exist each with
their own cross sections and you do not remember which name goes
with which element).
Select Beam Dimension Lists all dimensions pertaining to the named beam section. Select a
beam dimension which will become the variable.
Main Index
532 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 533
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Description Provides a space where you can describe the nature of the variable. If
no description is entered, Patran will create a description; it will
identify the name of the material property set and specific element
property (e.g., Density) from which the variable was created.
Analysis Value Shows the initial value of the variable. Enter a real, scalar number.
Category This entry acts as a filter that facilitates finding the property that will
be designated as the variable. The search will be limited to the
material to which the category type applies (e.g., Isotropic).
Select Material Lists the names of previously defined materials. Pick the material that
contains the property you wish to parameterize.
Select Materials by Selects a material associated with an element you pick on the screen
Elements (this can be helpful if you do not remember which material goes with
which element).
Select Property Name Selects a specific property contained in the named material definition.
Also enters its current value into the Analysis Value textbox.
Select Variables to Show Displays all previously defined variables. Pick one or several to show
in detail.
Select by Elements Selects the properties associated with elements you pick on the screen.
Main Index
534 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
After you picked the variable(s) you want to verify, press Apply and the variable information will be
displayed in a spreadsheet.
Pick any of the properties and its description will appear in the lower left corner of the spreadsheet.
Main Index
Tools>Model Variables 535
Creating and Managing Model Variables
Select Variable to Modify Lists all variables contained in the database. Pick the variable you want
to modify.
Variable Name Displays the name you selected. This name cannot be changed.
Description Displays the original description that you can edit or replace.
Modified Value Enter the new value you want to assign to the variable. All field values
and relationships that depend on the value of this parameter will be
updated when the new value is applied.
Main Index
536 Tools>Model Variables
Creating and Managing Model Variables
If a finite element property is defined as a function of a deleted variable, the current value will be used
for the property entry rather than leaving the property blank.
Select Variables to Delete Lists all variables contained in the database. Pick one or more
variables that you want to delete.
Select by Elements Select an element whose property is a variable that you want to delete.
Apply/Close Pick Apply to complete the deletion. Pick Close to cancel the delete
action and exit from the application.
Main Index
Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process 537
Creating Design Studies
This tool is used in conjunction with analysis setup of MSC Nastran SOL 200 optimization analyses. To
successfully run a SOL 200 job you must setup a design study. Design studies are then selected when a
SOL 200 job is submitted from the Analysis application. Please see Optimize (Ch. 3) in the Patran
Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide.
Before you can initiate a design study, you have to:
• consider the objective, or goal of the design study and of optimization. Although there may be a
number of possible objectives, in the majority of structural analysis problems the objective of
optimization is to minimize the weight of the model.
• parameterize the model. Define the variable dimensions or properties that may change in order
to achieve the optimal design.
• decide the constraints to place on the design. Define the condition that is considered as a limiting
factor in the optimization process.
This tool allows you to:
• define the design objectives of the optimization
• define the design variables or parametization of the model
• define the design constraints the model is subject to during the optimization
• create named constraint sets, a collection of constraints
• create a design study, a collection of objectives, variables, and constraints.
Important: Note on topology optimization versus sizing optimization. There are two
mechanisms to set up a topology optimization run.
• The first is through the Analysis form with the Action set to Optimize. The Customized
Solutions form is used to turn ON topology optimization and define constraints, objectives,
domains, and optimization controls. The mechanism is referred to as Quick Topology
Optimization.
• The second is through the definition of a design study using this tool. All constraints,
objectives, responses, etc. are defined and collected into a design study. Both sizing and
topology can be mixed in the same design study. This is referred to as General Topology
Optimization.
Quick Topology Optimization supersedes General Topology Optimization. If you wish to use
General Topology Optimization, please ensure that you have turned OFF the customized
solution topology optimization in the Analysis | Optimize | Customized Solutions... form and
that you select the design study and the objective/constraint of interest from the Design Study
Select... and the Global Obj/Cosntr Select forms.
Main Index
538 Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process
Creating Design Studies
Main Index
Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process 539
Creating Design Studies
Description Provides a textbox where you can enter a detailed description of the
design study.
Make Current Makes the selected design study current. Only those design parameter
values that originate in a current design study can be used to update
finite element model properties.
You can modify a design study even if it is not current (the toggle is
not on), but the parameter values of the model will not be updated.
Modifications to a design study that is not current will not affect a
current design study.
Design Study Setup
Design Variables Displays the Design Variables dialog box where you can review and
modify design variables (see Design Variables, 539).
Design Objective Displays the Design Objective dialog box (see Design Objectives, 543)
and allows you to associates them to a design study.
Design Constraints Displays the Design Constraints dialog box (see Design Constraints,
544) and associate them to a design study.
Constraint Sets Displays a dialog box where you can associate them to a design study.
Max/Min... Displays a dialog box where you can associate them to a design study.
Apply/Close Saves or discards input. The design study will be saved only if you
press Apply.
Design Variables
A design variable is a model variable that is used in a design study and in optimization. You create model
variables when you create a design variable or you can select an existing model variable to create the
design variable. When you press Design Variables in the Design Study dialog box, a spreadsheet will
display a summary of variables and their attributes. Because initially every model variable is also
considered a design variable, the spreadsheet will contain all variables defined in a database.
Main Index
540 Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process
Creating Design Studies
With the exception of the parameter names and their default initial values, all other data in the spreadsheet
may be modified.
The first column contains the name of the variable. Subsequent column headings and their contents are
as follows:
Design Variable A YES entry in this column confirms that the model variable is also a
design variable. If a variable is not to be used in the design study, you
can “deselect” it by clicking on the word YES. All variable
information for this item will be removed, indicating that the variable
is not a design variable, even though it is listed in the spreadsheet. To
toggle back to YES, click in the field again.
You can pick several consecutive items in this column at the same
time by dragging the cursor down the column.
A button will then appear at the top of the spreadsheet to show that the
current status is YES. Click on YES, to display the choices, pick NO,
then press the Enter (or Return) key, and the items will be deselected.
The button also works in the reverse (NO to YES).
Analysis Value Displays the value you assigned to the variable when you defined it.
This value cannot be changed here.
Main Index
Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process 541
Creating Design Studies
Design Value Provides a field where the value of a design variable will be placed, if
you define one that is different from the value of the model variable.
When you click in this field, a textbox appears at the top of the
spreadsheet. Type a new value then press Enter (or Return).
If you specify a new design value, the original lower and upper
boundary values will no longer be valid. Therefore, you will see the
following message:
Press Yes to acknowledge the warning. The new value will be entered
in the Design Value category and one or more of the boundary values
will change accordingly.
Lower Bound Displays the lowest value the design variable may assume during the
design study/design optimization process. By default, this boundary is
set to 10% below the base value. To change the boundary value, click
in the appropriate field then enter the new value in the Input New
Value textbox.
Upper Bound Displays the highest value the design variable may assume during the
design study/design optimization process. By default, this boundary is
set to 10% above the base value. To change the boundary value, click
in the appropriate field then enter the new value in the Input New
Value textbox.
Move Limit Specifies the change allowed in a design variable in each design cycle.
Default is 1.0, the equivalent of 100%.
Design Cycle Select Calls up the Design Cycle Select dialog box.
Defaults Resets all entries to their original value. Keeps the dialog box on the
screen.
OK/Cancel OK accepts all variables. Cancel closes the form.
Main Index
542 Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process
Creating Design Studies
Runs Displays the names of the result cases, or runs, that were output by
iteratively performing analysis with different values of the variables.
Design Cycles Presents the list of design cycles (subcases).
Design Variables Shows the design variables.
Values Displays the values of the design variables for a selected design cycle.
To apply the results of a particular cycle of an analysis run in the design study, pick the name of the Run
then pick a Design Cycle. The design variable values of that run and cycle will be shown. Press OK to
accept the new values. When the Design Variables spreadsheet is redisplayed, the variables will be
updated to the new values.
Design Responses
Design responses are objectives or constraints. If you define a design response, you can select it to be
used as either an Design Objective or a Design Constraint later on. You can also group them together
under a MaxMin definition. The information necessary to define a design resonse is the same as that for
an objective or constraint. See Design Objectives, 543 and Design Constraints, 544 below.
Main Index
Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process 543
Creating Design Studies
Design Objectives
The design objective is the goal of the optimization process.
The computation of total weight includes only elements with definable volume. Elements such as lumped
mass (CONM2) and distributed mass/unit length are excluded--in fact these are invariant during design
optimization.
• Linear Statics
• Normal Modes
• Buckling
• Frequency Response
• Transient Response
• Global
Response The combination of Solution and Response is the overall objective.
Each Solution has it’s own valid Responses, which can consist of
responses at discrete locations on the model
• Weight
• Volume
• Fractional Mass
• Average Compliance
Existing Objectives Displays names of the objective function already defined.
Use Existing Response For some Objectives, you may select an existing Response to define
the objective rather than redefining it again.
Min/Max Used to indicate whether the objective is to minimize or maximize the
objective such as weight or a response.
Component Type Entities For some responses, you must select the component of interest such as
translational maginitude, invariant or individual component. You may
also be required to select a model location such as a node, element, or
a property set that contains the entities of interest where the objective
is to be monitored for optimization.
Main Index
544 Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process
Creating Design Studies
Examples objectives:
• minimize the weight or volume of the structure
• minimize the displacement at a particular location
• maximize the buckling load
• minimize the stress in a member
• minimize the acceleration at a particular point at a particular frequency
Design Constraints
Design constraints provide certain restrictions, or limits, to ensure that as the optimization process
advances toward achieving the design objective, other design conditions do not become compromised.
As an example, you may decrease the cross-sectional area of a beam to minimize its weight, but not to
the extent where the axial stress generated in the beam increases beyond a specified value.
The nature of a design constraint depends, primarily, on the type of analysis solution you are performing.
In general, you define a constraint much the same way you define an objective except you give additional
information, the most important being the bounds in which the response must remain such as stress not
exceeding a particular value.
Main Index
Tools>Design Studies>Pre-Process 545
Creating Design Studies
Global Constraints
Weight, Volume, Fractional Mass, Average Compliance, Compliance, and Total Strain Enetergy are
global constraints that can be setup that require only the upper and/or lower bounds to be specified. The
latter two are valid for linear statics and normal modes only, respectively. Total Strain Energy requires
the mode of interest to be specified.
Constraint Sets
These are named sets of Design Constraints that can be selected later on when defining a Design Study
instead of selecting individual Design Constraints.
Maximum/Minimum Definitions
These are collections of responses for which special consideration is given to minimize (or maximize)
the maximum response of the collection. An example might be minimizing the stress in a set of elements
where each element response is setup separately as a Response. Thus they are all collected together in a
Min/Max definition.
When an input deck is created, each response is written to the input deck using a DRESP1 entry. The
DESRP2 entry is then used to associate all the DRESP1 entries and the BETA function keyword used to
indicate minimizing the maximum response. The constants C1, C2, and C3 are optional and default to
1.0, 0.005, and 10.0 respectively if not explicitly given. These constants are used in optimization
equations as explained in the Nastran Quick Reference Guide under the DRESP2 entry. C1 weights the
design variable, C2 sets an initial value, and C3 provides an offset to avoid dividing by zero.
Main Index
546 Tools>Design Studies>Post-Process
Creating Design Studies
After running a topology optimization analysis in SOL 200 of MSC Nastran, use the Action:
• Read Results - to first import the new mesh from a jobname.des. This file is created by the
analysis run. Or import from a jobname.xdb file if PARAM,POST,0 is included in the input
deck.
• Display Results - to view the results of the optimization run. A fringe plot of element density
distribution. Each time a plot is created a new group is formed and used to post the results on the
elements associated to the result case selected.
• FEM Smooth - to smooth the mesh. During this operation the elements are modified. A backup
database is created to preserve the original model in case you need to revert back to the original
model before smoothing.
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 547
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Results Templates provide a convenient means of storing in the database collections of settings that you
can use to create plots, graphs and reports under the Results menu. Settings stored in Results Templates
are applied to the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options menu settings for the following results
tools: Deformation Plot, Fringe Plot, Marker Vector Plot, Marker Tensor Plot, Graph, and Report.
The Results Templates menu provides the ability to Create, Edit, Copy, Delete, Export, and Import results
templates and then a means to Apply the template values to the Results Display Attributes and Plot
Options menu settings. Once you Create and Apply a Results Template from the Tools menu, you can go
the Results menu and select the “Use Templates” option. For more information on the Use Templates
option, see Use Templates (p. 24) in the Results Postprocessing.
Patran can also be customized to automatically load into a new or opening database a set of predefined
Results Templates.
Main Index
548 Tools>Results Templates
Creating and Applying Results Templates
template to the Results forms, you need to display either the Create Deformation or Modify Deformation
results menu.
Object Defines the Results tools to which the Template will be applied.
Existing Deformation Select an the existing template to apply. The list includes templates
Templates that match the selected object.
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 549
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Results Template. You can then use this Results Template to create more results tools (plots, graphs, and
reports) and be assured that they have the same attributes and options settings as the original.
Main Index
550 Tools>Results Templates
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Action
Create Accesses the settings of the Results Display Attributes or Plot Options
on a Results form and creates a template. You have the choice of “Use
Tool Values” or “Use Form Values.” Selecting “Use Form Values”
requires that the corresponding Results form to Create or Modify the
same Object already displayed before the template values can be read
from the Results Display Attributes or Plot Options forms. For
example, before creating a Deformation template using the Results
forms, you need to display either the Create Deformation or Modify
Deformation results menu and set the Attributes and Options menu
items to the desired settings.
Edit Editing uses the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options forms to
display the Results Template Values when the “Apply To Results
Forms” button is clicked. The corresponding Results form to Create or
Modify the same Object must already be displayed before the template
values can be applied to the Results Display Attributes and Plot
Options forms. For example, before applying a Deformation template
to the Results forms, you need to display either the Create
Deformation or Modify Deformation results menu.
Go to the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options forms and
modify the settings as desired. Return to the Results Template Edit
form.
Clicking the “Use Current Form Settings” will cause the currently
selected results template to be modified according to the current
settings of the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options forms.
Copy The “New Template Name” must be unique for its Object type
(Deformation, Fringe, etc.).
Delete Deletes an existing template.
Object Defines the Results tool to which the template will apply.
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 551
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Method “Use Tool Values” extracts the Results Display Attributes and Plot
Options values that were stored in the database in a Results tool. “Use
(for Creating Templates) Form Values” reads the Results Display Attributes and Plot Options
values directly from the Results forms. If you select “Use Form
Values” the corresponding Results form with the same Object must be
displayed before the template values can be read from the Results
Display Attributes and Plot Options forms.
Existing Deformation Select an the existing template to use. The list includes templates that
Templates match the selected object.
New Template Name The “New Template Name” must be unique for its Object type
(Deformation, Fringe, etc.).
Template Description The Template Description is optional. It lets you attach notes about the
results template to its database record. This can be helpful in keeping
track of your different results templates.
Select Deformation Tool Selects the Deformation Tool to use for the Results template.
Main Index
552 Tools>Results Templates
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Overwrite Db Template If the “Overwrite Db Template” toggle is set and the database already
has a results template of this type and name, it will be overwritten or
replaced with the new results template values.
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 553
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Spectrum & Range ... This button brings up the Results Template Spectrum & Range form.
Use this form to optionally select which color palette, spectrum and
range will be used for results plots using this template. You can also
use this form to store the exact definition of a color palette, spectrum
and/or range in the results template. Then, when this template is used
to create a result plot these definitions will be used to create the color
palette, spectrum and/or range for the plot. They will have the same
attributes and options settings as the original.
Main Index
554 Tools>Results Templates
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Action
Export The export menu takes selected Results Templates from the database
and writes to the file the session commands that would create the same
database content. These commands can then be used to recreate the
exported results templates in other databases (see the Import menu), or
as a standard set to be loaded into new or opened databases (see Auto
Load Details section of document).
Import The Import menu prompts you to select an existing Results Template
to import into the database.
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 555
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Object Defines the Results tool to which the template will apply.
Existing Deformation Select an the existing template to export. The list includes templates
Templates that match the selected object.
Set Overwrite Flag The “Set Overwrite Flag” toggle controls whether or not to overwrite
existing results templates of the same name and type when the file is
later imported or used for template initialization at database open or
new database creation. Setting the toggle turns ON overwrite.
Files... Browses and selects a Results Template to import.
Overwrite File/ When exporting, the “Overwrite File” toggle controls whether the
export file will be overwritten or appended to if it already exists.
Overwrite Db Template Setting the toggle causes it to be overwritten, while if it is not set, the
export will append to the end of the file if the file already exists.
When importing, the “Overwrite Db Template” toggle controls
whether a preexisting results template of this type and name will be
overwritten or replaced with the new results template values.
Main Index
556 Tools>Results Templates
Creating and Applying Results Templates
Main Index
Tools>Results Templates 557
Creating and Applying Results Templates
res_tmpl_set_force_overwrite(logical force_over )
If force_over is true, this will take precedence above the overwrite argument to res_temp_create_over.
This can be useful in the auto load files. The force_over value is reset to FALSE when using the results
template forms, so you will need to call res_tmpl_set_force_overwrite(TRUE) again after doing anything
with the ui. It is best just to call it whenever you want force_over to be true and not worry about when it
gets unset.
The files processed during the automatic loading process will be logged to a file in the working directory
named “ResTmplAutoLoadLog<random number>.ses and then this session will be played.
For more information see, The settings.pcl file (p. 47) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
558 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
A Plot Set is a grouping of result plot definitions and special commands that alter global settings effecting
the plots. These exist as rows of the Plot Set. The rows that represent the plot definitions include the
information that is required to generate an analysis results plot with Patran. For example a typical plot
definition would include the plot type (e.g. fringe, deformation, combination plot, etc.), analysis data
definition (e.g. result case, subcase, and result type), plot target entities, the plot’s graphic attributes, and
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 559
Creating Rebar Definitions
a view specification.Once a Plot Set is created and persisted in the Patran database it can be edited,
printed, deleted, or previewed.
Action
Create The Create form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database.
With this form you can enter a new Plot Set name, description, and
toggle the overwrite button. The Plot Set names are limited to 79
characters but there is no limit to the size of the description you can
enter.
Main Index
560 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
Copy The Copy form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database.
With this form you can enter a new Plot Set name and its description.
If the name you have assigned is equal to an existing name, the new
Plot Set will replace it if the overwrite option has been selected. When
the apply button is pressed a new Plot Set will be generated and the
contents of the selected set will be copied to it. If you did not enter a
Plot Set description a warning message will appear. The warning does
not effect the creation of the Plot Set.
Edit The Edit form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database. To
edit a Plot Set select it from the list and press the Edit button. When
the Edit button is pressed the Plot Set Edit Spread Sheet will appear.
For details on editing a plot set, please see, Editing a Plot Set Using the
Plot Set Spread Sheet, 561.
Import With the Import form you can enter the name of the Plot Set file you
would like to import located in your current working directory or you
can select the “Files...” submenu to specify the complete path to the
file you would like to import. An option is present so you can over
write a Plot Set that exists in the Patran database. This toggle has
higher precedence than any overwrite flags specified in the imported
file.
Export The Export form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database.
With this form you can choose one or more existing Plot Sets to
export. You may use the “Files...” button to select or enter the name
and path to the file that will receive the exported Plot Sets. You can
also just enter this information directly in the File Name data box. An
option is present to allow over writing an existing Plot Set file.
Delete The Delete form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database.
To delete either single or multiple Plot Sets first select the Plot Set(s)
and then press the “Apply” button.
Print The Print form shows the Plot Sets that exist in the Patran database
that you can print to a JPEG file. The Preview Only toggle will
preview the plots contained in a Plot Set(s) within Patran’s graphics
viewport(s) before printing them to JPEG files. With the Save Plots To
Db toggle you can persist the plot definitions within the Patran
database.
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 561
Creating Rebar Definitions
In the example shown above the “Tee Model - Static Analysis” plot set is empty. When plot sets are
created using the Create user interface you can enter the plot set name and a text description of the plot
set but not the contents of the plot set. The Edit user interface has been provided to allow you to define
the contents of your plot set.
To add a row to the plot set simply press the Add Row button. Once the Row Control sub form appears
change the Action to Add Row, enter a row name of your choice, select a Row Type, and finally press
the Apply button.
Main Index
562 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
Here a Fringe Plot row type is being added to the spread sheet. After creating a second row of type,
Deform Plot, the spread sheet should appear as shown below.
The plot set now contains two Plot Type rows but the definition of these rows are incomplete. Plot Type
rows contain columns that represent the plot’s Results data, graphic Attributes, and Target entities. To
define the contents of a column cell just click on that cell. Shown below is an example of editing the
Results cell within the Fringe Plot row. Here a Result Case, Result Type, and Derived Value have been
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 563
Creating Rebar Definitions
selected within the Result Control submenu that appeared. Clicking the Apply button will accept the
selected values and close the Result Control form.
Main Index
564 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
Similarly by selecting the Attributes cell within the Fringe Plot row the following Attributes Control sub
form will appear.
A fringe plot’s graphical attributes are defined by selecting an existing Fringe Result Template that has
been previously persisted in the Patran database. Any viewports, views, spectrums, or ranges that also
currently exist in the Patran database are shown in the various list boxes. You can choose one or more
selections from each list box. These selections will over-ride the definition that is contained in the
selected Fringe Result Template. Multiple selections from any of the list boxes will influence the number
of plots that will be created when you use the Plot Set Print functionality to preview or print the contents
of the Plot Set Spread Sheet. See Appendix B for a detailed discussion of the two types of Plot Iterators
that cause multiple plots to be rendered when multiple definitions of a plot attribute have been selected.
With the Attributes Row Control form you can add a plot name to the row’s plot definition. By saving
the plot with a name you are able to post or modify this plot when using the Patran post processor. The
Print Filename edit box allows you to assign the path to and name of the image files that will be produced
when you run the completed spread sheet.
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 565
Creating Rebar Definitions
The final step to complete the definition of the fringe plot row is to enter the plot target definition. Shown
below is the Target Row Control sub form that appears when you select the Target cell in the row.
The Row Control form shown above allows you select multiple target definitions for your plot row thus
allowing you to create multiple plots from a single row relative to the number of target definitions you
Main Index
566 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
have chosen. To create a target definition select the Create Target Definition button. The following
definition form will then appear.
Your choice of plot target types that you can create are those that are used within the Patran post processor
(e.g. Current Viewport, Elements, Groups, Properties, and Element Types). First select a target type using
the Target pull down menu. Next, select various choices that appear in the target types subordinate list
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 567
Creating Rebar Definitions
boxes. Shown below is an example where the user has created three target definitions using the Current
Viewport, Groups, and Elements options.
Main Index
568 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
Once you press the OK button in the Row Input sub form the target definitions will appear in the Row
Control form. To complete the Plot Row’s target definition you must select one or more of the target
definitions you have created and then press the Apply button as shown in the example below.
You must now perform similar operations for the Deform Plot row to complete its definition.
To create a combination plot all you need to do is add a new Plot Sheet row that is of type Combination,
and place that row above the plot type rows you desire to combine. To do this press the Add Row button,
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 569
Creating Rebar Definitions
set the Row Type to Combined Plot within the Row Control sub form that appears, and then press the
Apply button to cause the Combined Plot row to appear in the spread sheet.
When you create the Combined Plot row it will be added as the last row in the spread sheet. You now
must move the row above the plot type rows you want to combine (e.g. to row 1 position in our current
example) and then edit the Combined Plot row’s data, setting the number of rows that you will combine
to 2. To move the row first select the Combined Plot row’s Row Name cell. This will cause the selection
of option buttons to change at the bottom of the spread sheet. Select the Move Row option button. The
Main Index
570 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
Row Control sub form that contains the various move options will appear. Select Beginning from the
Position option pull down menu as shown below.
Pressing the Apply button will cause the Combined Plot row to move to the row 1 position and the Fringe
and Deform plot rows to shift down one position. Next, select the Data cell in the Combined Plot row.
When the Row Control sub form appears enter 2 in the Number of Rows list box. This causes the
following two plot type rows to be used to form the combined plot.
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 571
Creating Rebar Definitions
the Plot Set spread sheet by selecting the Done button then change the Action option on the main Results
Plot Sets form to Print. Select the Plot Set Definition to preview and the Preview Only radio button.
Main Index
572 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
When the Apply button is pressed the Print Control submenu and the first image defined by the Plot Set
contents will appear as shown below.
If your Plot Set definition defines more than one plot press the Advance One Image button to advance to
the next plot. Pressing the RESUME button will cause Patran to quickly render the remaining plots
defined by your Plot Set. When you have finished reviewing the last Plot Set image the Print Preview sub
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 573
Creating Rebar Definitions
form will close and the Print function will try to return Patran’s display back to its initial state before you
started the Plot Set preview as shown in the example below.
In the example we have been following above we defined a plot set that contained a single combined
fringe and deformed shape plot. With very few changes we can modify this example to produce several
plots with out adding another plot set row. In the example shown below the Plot Set is edited by selecting
Fringe Plot Results cell to cause the Results Row Control form to reappear. In addition to our initial
Main Index
574 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
selection of the von Mises Derived Result all six stress components of the symmetric stress tensor have
been selected at both the Z1 and Z2 positions.
Our final edit will be to change the default Tuple iterator to the Product Iterator. This is done by selecting
the Data cell of the Combine Plot row to cause the Combine Plot Row Control sub form to appear. The
Iterator Type option is used to change to the desired Product Iterator type. See Appendix B for a detailed
discussion of the different Iterator Types. The changes we have just made will cause 14 combination plots
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 575
Creating Rebar Definitions
to be rendered. The Product Iterator forms the combination plots from the single displacement plot with
the 14 possible fringe plots.
Main Index
576 Tools>Results Plot Sets
Creating Rebar Definitions
by using the Plot Set row that contained the multiple selection from both Result Case and Layer
Locations list boxes. Examples that contain correct selection methods are described below.
Example 1: If you select multiple entries in either the Result Cases or Layer Locations list box and then
select the NONE option from the associated Combination Methods list box, multiple plots for the
different selections will be generated relative to the Iterator type you have defined in the Combination
Plot row’s Data cell.
Example 2: If you select multiple entries in either the Result Cases or Layer Locations list box and then
select the NONE option from the associated Combination Methods list box, then the selected data sets
will be used to form a single data set whose entries are the point by point maximum of the data contained
within the selected data sets.
In the Result Row Control form shown to the right multiple Result Cases have been selected. When
multiple Result Cases are selected the Result Type entries that appear are the intersection of the results
types contained in the data sets identified by the selected Result Cases (for a selected Output Type).
Main Index
Tools>Results Plot Sets 577
Creating Rebar Definitions
Likewise, the Layer Location entries that appear are an intersection of the layer locations contained
within the data sets identified by the selected Result Types and Cases.
Main Index
578 Tools>Rebar Definitions
Creating Rebar Definitions
Creates 2D layered rebar definitions for use with the MSC.Marc Analysis Preference. Discrete rebar
models and general 3d layered rebar models are not supported. Rebar is actually an element property
definition for the MSC.Marc Preference, however this tool is used to automate the creation of rebar layers
and embed them into existing element meshes. This tool allows you to:
• Create, modify, delete and visualize Rebar data definitions.
• Support multiple rebar definitions, both isoparametric and skew type geometry.
• Support rebar membrane elements in 2D solid (plane strain and axisymmetric) elements.
• Create a customized mesh and automatically assign rebar properties to these elements.
Note: The Rebar Definition tool supports automatic generation of rebar elements and
properties for 2D solid elements only. For rebar embedded into 3D solid elements, you
must manually create the elements (mesh) and assign properties in the Element
Properties application using 2D Rebar Membrane definition. You can also manually
create 1D Rebar Membrane elements without using this tool but this is less convenient.
For more information please see Rebar Definition Tool (p. 158) in the Marc Preference Guide.
Main Index
Tools>Rebar Definitions 579
Creating Rebar Definitions
Action
Create/Modify Create and Modify are identical. The only difference is that Modify
requires you to pick an existing rebar definition before you can
proceed.
Main Index
580 Tools>Rebar Definitions
Creating Rebar Definitions
Main Index
Tools>Bolt Preload 581
Using the Beam Library
This modeling tool allows you to facilitate the creation of bolt preloads and the associated MPCs. This
tool can be used for both Marc and MSC Nastran analyses as well as others that recognize explicit MPC
definitions.
Regardless of which method is used, the following operations are done to create each bolt pre-load.
1. The mesh of the bolt is split at the designated cutting plane. This cutting plane is either designated
by the user or determined by the tool. Coincident nodes are created for element nodes above and
below the plane and the element connectivities are regenerated.
2. MPCs are created to connect the two sections above and below the determined cutting plane. The
coincident nodes created in the previous step are tied together via MPCs. Either Overclosure type
or Explicit MPCs are created. Marc analysis and MSC Nastran SOL 600 typically use
Overclosure types which other analysis solutions or code can use Explicit MPCs.
3. A control node is created and connected to each set of node pairs. A coordinate system is created
at the specified control node location which can be offset as required for visualization purposes
4. A load or displacement is applied for the pre-load in the local Y direction (axial bolt direction) or
the coordinate system created at the control node location.
5. Each bolt pre-load is named and stored in the database.
6. Undo, Show and Delete capabilities are available.
Three methods to help you define the bolt pre-loads are available. Each has some specific inputs required.
All have common inputs some specific inputs for each method as explained below:
Geomtric based
This is by far the easiest and most intuitive method to use. A set of elements is selected that defines the
bolt. Based on the geomtric dimensions and MSC Patran’s mass property utilities, the most likely axial
direction of the bolt is determined. The mesh is split at the center of the selected element set. If the
geometric properties of the selected element set does not distinctly determine the axial direction of the
bolt, the cutting plane may not be determined correctly and a strange cut will result. At least a two to one
axial versus width ratio is recommended.
Vector based
This method requires that you define a vector, the base of which determines the location of the cutting
plane, which is normal to the defined vector. The element set selected must have a layer or two or three
element both above and below the base of the defined vector plane.
Element based
This method may be more advantageous for certain element types in that you select element faces (3D),
element edges (2D), or elements (1D) where you want the mesh split and the MPCs applied. For 3D
Main Index
582 Tools>Bolt Preload
Using the Beam Library
elements, this can be difficult as the graphics screen can get messy trying to select element faces,
especially TET elements. For 2D and 1D elements, this method is easy. The split will occur only for the
selected element entities, which may be problematic if you only select a portion of the cross section.
Each input is described in the table below:
Action
Create Create an bolt preload. If you need to modify an existing bolt preload,
you have to delete and then re-create the bolt preload.
Delete Delete an existing bolt preload. You can select an existing named bolt
preload or if you are not sure which one you want, you can set the
Method to Control Node and select the control node. It will figure out
which bolt preload is associated to the selected control node. Note that
any entities created by the bolt preload are deleted unless those entities
are modified by the user to reference other entities in some way.
Warning message are issued in those cases and some of the entities
such as the coordinates will not be deleted.
Identify Identify allows you to select a control node and the name of the bolt
preload is returned as an informational message.
Show Show is informational only and indicates the total number of bolt
preloads defined.
Object When creating a bolt preload, you may place either a force or a
prescribed displacement.
Method The three methos are described above as Geometric, Vector, and
Element based.
New Bolt Name Enter a bolt preload name.
MPC Type Select the type of MPC required. You may not be given a choice
depending on the Analysis Preference set. Overclosure is the desired
method for MSC.Marc and MSC Nastran SOL 600. Other MSC
Nastran solutions and other analysis codes need Explicit MPCs
defined. For MSC.Marc, Overclosure creates TYING type 69 and
Explicit creates SERVO LINKs. For MSC Nastran SOL 600,
MBOLTUS is created for Overclosure. In all other cases, Explicit
MPCs should be used.
Control Node Offset A vector can be supplied (optional) to offset the location of the control
node. This is highly recommended for visualization purposes. A vector
is provided, the length of which is the offset from the center of the
cutting plane. You may enter a vector in any way the is allowable with
the select mechanism or you can manually type between the “< >”
brackets a valid three-component translational vector, e.g., <0, 5, 2>.
Method = Geometric
Main Index
Tools>Bolt Preload 583
Using the Beam Library
Element List Select a list of elements that sufficiently defines the bolt geometry. The
axial direction of the bolt should be longer than the lateral directions
in order for the algorithm to determine the proper axial direction of the
bolt. The cutting plane will be created at the center of the bolt as best
as possible based on the element connectivity. The control node offset
will be created from the location of the cutting plane.
Method = Vector
Bolt Axis This is a required vector input to define the axial direction of the bolt.
Typically you only need to use the select mechanism to define a vector
using two nodes on the outside of the bolt. You can use any method
that the select mechanism allows to define a vector. You may enter a
vector in any way the is allowable with the select mechanism or you
can manually type between the “< >” brackets a valid three-component
translational vector, e.g., <0, 5, 2>. In this method, you can define any
direction to do the cut and apply the preload. Care should be taken in
that some strange cuts may results. This is the method to use if you
wish to use a non-axial bolt preload.
Element List For this method, select enough elements above and below the base of
the Bolt Axis vector such that a proper cut can be made. Two or three
layers of elements above and below is usually sufficient. An error may
result or a bad looking cut may be had if not enough element above and
below are given.
Method = Elemental
Target Element Type In this method, you must select the element dimensionality of the bolt:
1D bars, 2D elements, or 3D solids.
Application Region The application region defines the actual location where the split is
made. For 1D beam/bar elements, you select a single element and the
split is made at the bottom node. For 2D (2D solid) elements, you
select element edges that define the cut. For 3D elements, you select
the element faces to define the cut. All the element edges or faces need
to be connected together in order for this method to create a proper cut.
Use the FEM application and do a Verify / Element / Boundary to ensure that the bolt tool properly cut
the bolt into two sections with coincident nodes between.
Main Index
584 Tools>Feature Recognition
Recognizing and editing geometric features
Recognize Automatic these options are not used. For automatic recognition these
options have been set to default values of Hole - Single, Chamfer - Chain,
Blend - Chain.
These options are valid for Recognize - Interactive only and respective
values get passed through the second argument in the recognition API.
> status = ifr_recognize_blends_list(entity_list,
propagation, topology, $entity_type,
$number_of_features)
Recognize Automatic works with Geometric Entity as Solid only.
Recognize Automatic does not need any input other that Solid ID in which
the features need to be recognized. All other inputs are defaulted. It is
available to provide user a convenience. It will recognize the features in the
whole solid. Recognizing features in the whole solid may not always be
useful as there may actually only be the need of recognizing features in one
particular region of the solid. In this case simply select the faces / edges
where the need to recognize the features exists and use Recognize
Interactive.
Main Index
Tools>Feature Recognition 585
Recognizing and editing geometric features
Main Index
586 Tools>MSC.Fatigue
Invoking the MSC.Fatigue Application Module
Selecting the Fatigue option will bring up the MSC.Fatigue user interface form if installed and licensed.
From this form you can setup, submit, monitor, or abort a MSC.Fatigue analysis or access any of the
various MSC.Fatigue modules such as the Materials Database Manager (PFMAT) or Time History
Database Manager (PTIME). MSC.Fatigue enables you to perform subsequent fatigue calculations based
on the stress or strain results once you have completed a finite element analysis. Three fatigue analyses
are contained within the MSC.Fatigue module. Total life analysis based on the nominal stress life (S-N)
method, Crack initiation based on the local strain method, and Crack Growth based on linear elastic
fracture mechanics.
Main Index
Tools>Random Analysis 587
Invoking the MSC.Fatigue Application Module
MSC.Random is a random analysis software package used with MD Nastran and Patran. It was
developed by field engineers at MSC.Software to offer a fast, integrated random analysis solution and all
of MSC.Random’s analysis capabilities and generated results are available from within the Patran
environment.
MSC.Random software technology is similar to the existing MD Nastran random analysis capability. In
both packages, random analysis is treated as a data reduction procedure that is applied to frequency
response analysis, but with MD Nastran
, the output request for a random response can only be made through the XYOUT module. This requires
that you to prepare XYPLOT or XYPRINT entries for each degree of freedom for nodal responses, and
for each stress/force component for element responses. Even for a small size model, you must prepare a
large number of XYPLOT/XYPRINT entries. In addition, the results that are calculated cannot be
postprocessed from within Patran. For more information on Random Analysis please see, Random
Analysis (Ch. 11).
Main Index
588 Tools>Laminate Modeler
Invoking the MSC.Laminate Modeler Application Module
MSC.Laminate Modeler is a Patran module for aiding the design, analysis, and manufacture of laminated
composite structures. The functions available within MSC.Laminate Modeler allow you to visualize the
manufacturing process and estimate the quantity of material involved. Representative analysis models of
the component can be produced very rapidly to allow effective layup optimization. Finally, a “ply book”
and other manufacturing data can be produced.
Selecting Laminate Modeler from the Tools menu activates the Laminate Modeler module if installed and
licensed. For more information, see the MSC.Laminate Modeler User’s Guide
Main Index
Tools>Properties Import 589
Invoking the Patran Analysis Manager Application Module
To use the Properties Import feature you will need to create and select an input file. You will need to
decide how element properties will be named if new element properties are made.
Creation of a Property
The creation of a property requires all of the following fields:
shell ; 51 ; 25 ; 35 ; 1 ; 1 ; 20
bar ; 11 ; 2 ; 42 ; 1 ; 1 ; 20
Main Index
590 Tools>Properties Import
Invoking the Patran Analysis Manager Application Module
continued...
13 36 4095 1 10 11 2 APPRGN
Material Thickness Y of NA Area I11 I22 Bar Element
Node 1 orientation list
M:Alum ;2 ; ; ; ; ; ;E 10:15:2
M:Steel ; ; ;10 ;10 ;10 ;1, 0, 0 ;E 2:5
Modification of a Property
If you want to modify a property, you will need to create a text file similar to the following:
PNAME ; 13 6 APPRGN
$Prop name Material Bar orientation Element list
bar ; ;1, 0, 1.0 ;
shell ; M:Alum ; ;E 1:10
The above example modifies the property “bar” to change the “bar orientation” to <1,0,1.0> and the
property “shell” to have the material “Alum” and an appregion of Elements 1 through 10.
The 2D shell data would show up as if the following session file had been played.
The easiest way to find the ELTYPEID thru the DOFOPTID data is by looking at the session file. The
session file above corresponds to the input file above. Also, the IDs of the words for the data “m:STEEL”
and for the thickness “0.33” can also be derived from the same session file. The data you have entered
Main Index
Tools>Properties Import 591
Invoking the Patran Analysis Manager Application Module
is found in the first and third arguments of the data array. The IDs for those pieces of data can be found
highlighted in the ID array below.
$ comment
PNAME ; 4061
PROP_BAR ;RL0.,0.8,1.
$ comment
$ Creation of Beam Property
EID ; 13 ; 1 ; 10 ; 11 ; 6
101 ; m:STEEL ; 1.1 ; 10.1 ; 1.1 ;RV<1,0,1.1>
102 ; m:STEEL ; 1.1 ; 10.1 ; 1.1 ;RV<1,0,1.2>
The above example assumes that elements 101 and 102 are already associated to an element property.
The code then "expands" the element property for the elements, and modifies those expanded properties
to change the properties 13, 1, 10, 11 and 6. (Which are Material, Area, I11, 122 and Bar Orientation).
Main Index
592 Tools>Properties Import
Invoking the Patran Analysis Manager Application Module
Example 1
$ This File Modifies an existing Property
$ Regular 2D Shell, modifies the Matl and thickness.
PNAME ; 13 ; 36
aaa ; m:mat2 ; 0.31
$
Example 2
$ This file Creates a New Property
$ If element 4 is already associated, it removes the previous
$ association.
ELTYPEID ; GEOOPTID ; CONOPTID ; FOROPTID ; LAMOPTID ; DOFOPTID ; EID
; 13 ; 36
51 ; 25 ; 35 ; 1 ; 1 ; 20 ; 4
; m:mat1 ; 0.01
Example 3
$ This file changes element 4 to have a thickness of 0.08 and a
$ mat of steel2
$ Elem ; material ; thickness
EID ; 13 ; 36
4 ; m:steel2 ; 0.08
Example 4
$ This file Creates a New Property
$ The elements from the APPRGN Column are assigned to the new
property
ELTYPEID ; GEOOPTID ; CONOPTID ; FOROPTID ; LAMOPTID ; DOFOPTID ; 13 ; 36 ;
APPRGN ; PNAME
51 ; 25 ; 35 ; 1 ; 1 ; 20 ; m:mat1 ; 0.01 ; E
1:15:2 ; imported
Main Index
Tools>Analysis Manager 593
Invoking the Patran Analysis Manager Application Module
The Patran Analysis Manager provides convenient and automatic submittal, monitoring, control and
general management of analysis jobs to local or remote networked systems. Primary benefits of using the
Analysis Manager are engineering productivity and efficient use of local and corporate network-wide
computing resources for finite element analysis.
The Analysis Manager has its own scheduling capability. If commercially available queueing software,
such as LSF (Load Sharing Facility) from Platform Computing Ltd. or NQS is available, then the
Analysis Manager can be configured to work closely with it.
Selecting Analysis Manager from the Tools menu activates the Analysis Manager module if licensed and
installed. For more information, see the Patran Reference Manual.
The new rotordynamics capability provides you with a relatively simple method of performing the design
and analysis of structures with rotating components. The new rotordynamic capability can be used in
frequency response (direct and modal), complex modes (direct and modal), static, nonlinear transient,
and linear transient (direct only) analyses.
For more information on Rotor Dynamics, see the Overview (Ch. 1) in the Patran Interface to MD
Nastran Preference Guide.
This tool is used to curve fit experimentally derived raw elastomeric material data and fit a number of
material models to the data. This data can then be saved as constitutive hyperelastic and/or viscoelastic
models for use in an MSC.Marc analysis. The operation of curve fitting is done in three basic steps
corresponding to the actions in the Action pull-down menu.
1. Import the Raw Data - data is read from standard ASCII files and stored in Patran in the form of
a field (table).
2. Select the Test Data - the fields from the raw data are associated to a test type.
3. Calculate the Properties - the curve fit is done to the selected test data; coefficients are calculated
based on the selected material model; curve fit is graphically displayed and the properties can be
saved as a constitutive model for a later analysis.
Main Index
594 Tools>Experimental Data Fitting
Experimental Data Fitting for MSC.Marc Analysis Preference
Main Index
Tools>Experimental Data Fitting 595
Experimental Data Fitting for MSC.Marc Analysis Preference
1. Typical stress-strain data for Deformation Mode tests are referenced in the Primary column. If
you have volumetric data, these are entered in the Secondary column databoxes and are optional.
2. For Viscoelastic (time relaxation data), you must turn ON the ViscoElastic toggle. Only
viscoelastic curve fitting will be done in this case. To return to Deformation Mode, turn this toggle
OFF.
3. Damage models are not yet supported.
4. When you press the Apply button, you will be taken to the third step.
Calculate Properties
Once test data has been associated to a test type or mode the curve fit function is performed by following
these steps:
1. Select the material Model you wish to curve to fit. The available models will depend on the test
data selected in the previous step. Hyperelastic models will be available for deformation mode
test data. Viscoelastic models will be available for relaxation test data.
2. In general you will leave Use Test Data to ‘All’ for hyperelastic models. If however you only want
the curve fit to use one of the deformation modes, you may set it here.
3. Press the Compute button. The coefficient values will be displayed in the Coefficients
spreadsheet.
4. To visually see the curve fit, press the Plot button. You may repeat the above four steps for as
many material models as you wish to curve fit.
5. Select an existing material or type in a New Material Name and press the Apply button to save
the material model as either a Hyperelastic or Viscoelastic constitutive model for use in a
subsequent analysis.
Keep in mind the following points and considerations when calculating properties:
1. The plots are appended to the existing XY Window until you press the Unpost Plot button. You
can turn the Append function ON/OFF under the Plot Parameters... form.
2. By default, all the deformation modes are plotted along with the raw data even if raw data has not
been supplied for those modes. This is very important. These additional modes are predicted for
you. You should always know your model’s response to each mode of deformation due to the
different types of stress states. For example, a rule of thumb for natural rubber and some other
elastomers is that the tensile tension biaxial response should be about 1.5 to 2.5 times the uniaxial
tension response.
3. You can turn ON/OFF these additional modes or any of the curves under the Plot Parameters
button as well as change the appearance of plot. More control and formatting of the plot can be
done under the XY Plot application on the Patran application switch on the main form.
4. Viscoelastic constitutive models are useless without a Hyperelastic constitutive model also. Be
sure your model has both defined under the same material name if you use viscoelastic properties.
Main Index
596 Tools>Experimental Data Fitting
Experimental Data Fitting for MSC.Marc Analysis Preference
5. You may actually change the coefficient values in the Coefficients spread sheet if you wish to see
the effect they have on the curve fit. Select one of the cells with the coefficient you wish to change,
then type in a new coefficient value in the Coefficient Value data box and press the Return or
Enter key. Then press the Plot button again. If you press the Apply button, the new values will be
saved in the supplied material name.
6. For viscoelastic relaxation data, the Number of Terms used in the data fit should, as a rule of
thumb, be as many as there are decades of data.
7. A number of optional parameters are available to message the data and control the curve fitting.
See the table below for more detailed descriptions.
For more information, see Experimental Data Fitting (p. 112) in the Marc Preference GuideChapter 1:
Overview.
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats Patran Reference Manual
A File Formats
The Neutral System Concept 712
The Neutral File 713
Session File/Journal File 739
IGES File 741
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files 744
Main Index
712 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral System Concept
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 713
The Neutral File
Finite Element Model The most common use of the neutral file is to output a finite element
Output model for analysis. In this application, the neutral file is read by an
application interface which converts Patran model data into the required
input format for a particular analysis program. A typical example is the
PATNAS interface which translates neutral file data into a bulk data
deck for input to Nastran.
Geometry Model Output It is also possible to output a neutral file containing mathematical
definitions of a geometry model. Points, parametric cubic curves,
parametric bi-cubic surfaces, and parametric tri-cubic solids are the only
geometry forms which can be written to a neutral file. This information
can then be accessed by programs that perform such functions as
automated drafting or preparation of tapes for numerically controlled
milling machines.
Finite Element Model Through the use of an “inverse translator”, an existing finite element
Input model in the form of an input deck for a particular analysis program can
be input to Patran. Once in the Patran database, the model can be
displayed interactively, modified if necessary, and even output to a
different analysis program if desired.
Main Index
714 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
Geometry Model Input Dependent upon your particular engineering application, it may be cost
effective to input part of your problem's geometry via the neutral file
rather than the keyboard. This is especially true if points defining your
geometry can be computed using relatively simple algorithms. In this
case, rather than calculating coordinates of points and typing them into
Patran by hand, try writing a short computer program to compute the
coordinates and output them to a file in neutral file format.
Sub-Structuring One of the most effective techniques for modeling a large, complex
structure is to break it up into its component parts. Each component part
is separated by identifying the finite element node locations at each
interface. Then, each part can be modeled as a separate sub-structure
independent of the other parts.
An important point here is that each modeler can use Patran's default ID
number assignments for his nodes, elements and geometry items
without having to worry about later conflict with other sub-structures.
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 715
The Neutral File
Main Index
716 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 717
The Neutral File
The header card is followed by “KC” data card images. The meaning of the header variables for each
packet type plus the content and format of its data cards are presented in PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File
Contents and Format, 717. The packet types are listed in the order of their appearance (if present) in the
neutral file.
Main Index
718 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 719
The Neutral File
Data Card 2 Format (I1, 1A1, I8, I8, I8, 2X, 6I1)
ICF GTYPE NDF CONFIG CID PSPC
ICF*=Condensation flag (0 = unreferenced)
GTYPE=Node type
NDF*=Number of degrees-of-freedom
CONFIG=Node configuration
CID=Coordinate frame for analysis results
PSPC*=6 permanent single point constraint flags 0 or 1
* These parameters are not currently used.
Main Index
720 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
θ1, θ2, θ3=Material Orientation angles (for bars, these values are the coordinates of a point in the bar
X”Y-plane)
*Config is used to specify the element type needed to interpret the element data in Packet Type 04.
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 721
The Neutral File
*Material Types:
Main Index
722 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
IV=Material IDN2=Nodes
KC=(N4 + 4)/5N3*=Configuration
N4=Number of data fields
* Definition of applicable element type (see Packet Type 02)
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 723
The Neutral File
Main Index
724 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
CID ICOMP(6)
CID=Coordinate frame ID
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 725
The Neutral File
Main Index
726 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
U 0 Z U 1 C 1 H U 2 C2 H U 3 C 3 H … H U n C n H C 0
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 727
The Neutral File
Main Index
728 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
N2*=User function ID
* This parameter is not currently used.
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 729
The Neutral File
N2=User function ID
Main Index
730 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
OBSTR=Non-obstruction Flag
(0 = potential obstruction, 1 = non-obstruction)
DYN=Dynamic Flag (0 or 1)
SURF=Surface (0 = top, 1 = bottom)
NODE(8)=8 element node flags (0 or 1)
*NTYPE meanings:
1grid# 8quadrilateral
2line 9tetrahedron
3patch 11wedge
4hyperpatch 12hexahedron
5node 19coordinate frame
6bar 22multi-point constraints
7triangle
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 731
The Neutral File
NTYPEs 6-12 may have 100 or 200 added to the basic NTYPE. The number of hundreds
is usually the number of midside nodes.
Main Index
732 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
ID=Patch ID
IV=0 not/applicable
KC=10(for text files)
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 733
The Neutral File
Packet Types 42, 43 or 44: GFEG Table for Line, Patch or Hyperpatch 1
(when created from a GFEG command)
1
The format of the GFEG tables changed with Patran release 2.0.
Main Index
734 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
+ if specified by user,
- if assigned by Patran
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 735
The Neutral File
Packet Type 42, 43 or 44: GFEG Table for Line, Patch or Hyperpatch
(when created from a MESH command)
Main Index
736 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
+ if specified by user,
- if assigned by Patran
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 737
The Neutral File
+ if specified by user
- if assigned by Patran
*These are local node ID numbers corresponding to record numbers in the associated GFEG table.
Main Index
738 Patran Reference Manual
The Neutral File
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 739
Session File/Journal File
Justification for Session A session file serves a variety of purposes. A session file is a compact
Files method of storing an entire model or just individual operations; it
contains no database. A session file is a text file containing a series of
directives (e.g., PCL commands) to be executed. These directives can be
used to re-create a model from scratch, be a transaction log for review
and/or modification, used as a macro/subprogram for performing a
sequence of commands repetitively, or support site and/or project
customization. In addition, Patran can process most ASM NOODL’s
contained in PATRAN 2.5 session files.
Recording Session Files Session files can be recorded from current models. Session files are
designed to contain any combination of comments, PCL (PATRAN
Command Language), executable statements and most ASM NOODL
commands. Each command entered into the command line either directly
by the user (e.g., keyboard input, history recall) or indirectly (commands
indicated as “events of interest” by applications) are recorded.
Session File Names By convention, session files are named “<file>.ses”. The first
portion <file> is a user selectable base file name. The second portion,
“ses”, is the standard session file extension. In addition, a file revision
is appended to all session files. Session files created by Patran have
revision numbers that are either specified manually or generated
automatically. If a session file name is supplied without any extension
(indicated by the presence of a “.” in the file name), the standard
extension “.ses” is automatically appended.
Note: Revisions greater than “99”are not listed in numerical order on the
forms.) Automatically generated revision numbers are always created as
one (1) greater than the highest existing revision number. Gaps in
revision numbers are not automatically filled in by the system.
For recording session file, the supplied name is checked for existence. If
this file does exist, then a new revision (starting with “01”) is created.
In order to play a session file, the supplied name is also checked for
existence. If this file does not exist, then the highest existing revision of
this file is used. If no revision exists, then no file is played.
Main Index
740 Patran Reference Manual
Session File/Journal File
Session File Contents Session files are text files that may contain PCL statements or NOODL
commands. No single physical line may exceed 256 characters. The
logical line length limit is 7000 characters.
Session files are designed to support the PCL comment marker ($). In
addition, there are two special cases of comments that are written to a
session file. Any comment lines that do not contain one of these two
special comment markers will be written unchanged to the recording
session file. None of these lines are executable, but may have varying
results during playback of a session file and the recorded session file.
Patran writes out certain comments using the system comment marker.
These include messages about session file start and end information.
When a session file is read, any lines with this marker are ignored and not
displayed in the history window or recorded in the recording session file.
A user can enable and disable the writing of these comments using the
PCL built-in command verbose.
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 741
IGES File
Main Index
742 Patran Reference Manual
IGES File
Product definition data may be categorized by their principal roles in defining a product. An example of
such a categorization is presented in Figure A-1. The IGES specification specifies communications
formats (information structures) for subsets of the product definition:
Administrative
• Product Identification
• Product Structure
Design/Analysis
• Idealized models
Basic Shape
• Geometric
• Topological
Augmenting Physical Characteristics
Presentational Information
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 743
IGES File
reside in another file. Typical non-geometry entities for drawing definition, annotation, and
dimensioning are the view, drawing, general note, witness line, and leader. Typical non-geometry entities
for attributes and groupings are the property and the associativity entities.
A file consists of five or six sections: Flag (in the case of the binary or compressed ASCII form), Start,
Global, Directory Entry, Parameter Data, and Terminate. A file may include any number of entities of
any type as required to represent the product definition. Each entity occurrence consists of a directory
entry and a parameter data entry. The directory entry provides an index and includes descriptive attributes
about the data. The parameter data provides the specific entity definition. The directory data are
organized in fixed fields and are consistent for all entities to provide simple access to frequently used
descriptive data. The parameter data are entity-specific and are variable in length and format. The
directory data and parameter data for all entities in the file are organized into separate sections, with
pointers providing bidirectional links between the directory entry and parameter data for each entity. The
specification provides for groupings whose definitions will be found in a file other than the one in which
they are used.
Each entity defined by the file structure has a specific assigned entity type number. While not all are
assigned at this time, entity type numbers 0000 through 0599 and 0700 through 5000 are allocated for
specific assignment. Entity type numbers 0600 through 0699 and 10000 through 99999 are for
implement-defined (i.e., macro) entities.
Some entity types include a form number as an attribute. The form number serves to further define or
classify an entity within its specific type.
The entity set includes a provision for associativities and properties. The Associativity Entity provides a
mechanism to establish relationships among entities and to define the meaning of the relationship. The
Property Entity allows specific characteristics, such as line widening, to be assigned to an entity or
collection of entities. Each entity format includes a structure for an arbitrary number of pointers to
associativities and properties. The file structure provides for both predefined associativities and
properties to be included in the specification and unique definitions which will be defined by the
implement.
Main Index
744 Patran Reference Manual
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 745
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Binary Version
Parameter Description
h3 80A1 title stored in an 80 word real or integer array
(1 character per word).
SUBTITLE1 Same format as TITLE
SUBTITLE2 Same format as TITLE
Main Index
746 Patran Reference Manual
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Text Version
Record 1: h3 (80A1)
Record 2: NNODES, MAXNOD, DEFMAX, (2I9,
E15.6, 2I9)
NDMAX, NWIDTH
Record 3: SUBTITLE1 (80A1)
Record 4: SUBTITLE2 (80A1)
Record 5 to n+4: NODID, (DATA(J), J=1, NWIDTH) (I8,
(5E13.7))
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 747
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Binary Version
Parameter Description
h3 80A1 title stored in an 80 word real or integer array
(1 character per word).
SUBTITLE1 Same format as TITLE
SUBTITLE2 Same format as TITLE
NNODES Number of nodes (integer)
MAXNOD Highest node ID number (integer)
DEFMAX Maximum absolute displacement (real)
NDMAX ID of node where maximum displacement occurs (integer)
NWIDTH Number of columns after NODID for nodal information (inte-
ger)
NODID Node ID number (integer)
DATA Result quantities organized by column index (real)
Text Version
Record 1: h3 (80A1)
Record 2: NNODES, MAXNOD, DEFMAX, (2I9
E15.6, 2I9)
NDMAX, NWIDTH
Record 3: SUBTITLE1 (80A1)
Record 4: SUBTITLE2 (80A1)
Record 5 to n+4: NODID, (DATA(J), J=1, NWIDTH) (I8,
(5E13.7))
Note: MAXNOD, DEFMAX, NDMAX can be set to zero unless it is a displacement results.
Main Index
748 Patran Reference Manual
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Binary Version
Parameter Description
h3 80A1 title stored in an 80 word real or integer array
(1 character per word)
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 749
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Text Version
Record 1: h3 (80A1)
Record 2: NWIDTH (I5)
Record 3: SUBTITLE1 (80A1)
Record 4: SUBTITLE2 (80A1)
Record 5 to n+4: ID, NSHAPE, (DATA(J), J=1,NWIDTH) (2I8, /,
(6E13.7))
1 4
.1483126E+05 .1492715E+05-.3057466E+03 .2852407E+01-.5369175E+01 .0000000E+00
.9919469E+04 .1488886E+05-.8247605E+04-.8088444E+04 .3114060E+03 .2852407E+01
-.5369175E+01 .0000000E+00-.5445350E+04 .8186974E+04 .0000000E+00 .2237059E+04
.3357410E+04
2 4
.6935732E+04 .1174489E+05 .2986205E+03-.3140930E+03 .2887558E+03 .0000000E+00
.6226875E+04 .1023987E+05-.2068523E+04-.6511836E+04-.1064728E+03-.3140930E+03
.2887558E+03 .0000000E+00-.2860119E+04 .5766014E+04 .0000000E+00 .1683378E+04
.2535498E+04
3 4
-.8141948E+04 .3225449E+04-.2815713E+04-.3211482E+03-.1085647E+04 .0000000E+00
-.1638833E+04 .1125793E+05 .1245072E+05 .7406104E+03 .3047678E+04-.3211482E+03
-.1085647E+04 .0000000E+00 .4397110E+04 .1319897E+05 .0000000E+00 .1379138E+04
.2083729E+04
Main Index
750 Patran Reference Manual
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Binary Version
Parameter Description
h3 80A1 title stored in an 80 word real or integer array
(1 character per word)
Main Index
Ap. A: File Formats 751
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
A results template file is required for each PATRAN 2.5 results file type to be imported. You can create
or customize your own results template file.
The structure of the results template file is as follows:
Main Index
752 Patran Reference Manual
PATRAN 2.5 Results Files
Example 1 Example 2
KEYLOC = 0 KEYLOC = 19
TYPE = SCALAR TYPE = SCALAR
COLUMN = 11 KEY = 67
PRI = Stress COLUMN = 11
SEC = von Mises PRI = Stress
TYPE = TENSOR SEC = von Mises
COLUMN = 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 TYPE = SCALAR
PRI = Stress KEY = 33
SEC = Components COLUMN = 11
CTYPE = ELEM PRI = Stress
TYPE = END SEC = von Mises
TYPE = TENSOR
KEY = 67
COLUMN = 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
PRI = Stress
SEC = Components
CTYPE = ELEM
TYPE = TENSOR
KEY = 33
COLUMN = 15, 16, 0, 18, 0, 0
PRI = Stress
SEC = Components
CTYPE = ELEM
TYPE = END
Main Index
Ap. B: Printing Options Patran Reference Manual
B Printing Options
Introduction 754
Device-dependent Hardcopy File 755
Additional Information for Printers/Plotters 756
If Your Plot Does Not Turn Out as Expected 757
Hardware Setup 758
Supported Hardware for Patran Hardcopy 759
Main Index
754 Patran Reference Manual
Introduction
B.1 Introduction
There are numerous ways to produce a hardcopy of your workstation screen, from platform-specific
programs that create a bit-mapped image to photographing the screen. One of the available methods is
the Print utility provided with Patran. It is designed to be flexible and easy to use.
Patran provides user control over creating hardcopy output from within the Print forms. Refer to
File>Print, 217 for a description of these forms. The device-dependent hardcopy file varies depending on
the specific hardcopy device requirements. Refer to Device-dependent Hardcopy File, 755.
Main Index
Ap. B: Printing Options 755
Device-dependent Hardcopy File
Postscript Default This will translate a file into a device-specific file called ps.plt.
This file consists of commands which have been translated into the
PostScript language. The PostScript driver will support gray scale or
256 colors, depending on the hardcopy parameter setup and/or the type
of printer to which the device-specific file is sent.
PatranHard Default Produces a patran.hrd file which cannot be sent to a printer.
CGM This will generate and translate a temporary patran.hrd file into a
device specific file called cgm.plt. This file consists of commands
which have been translated to conform to the Computer Graphics
Metafile Standard.
HPGL This will generate and translate a temporary patran.hrd file into an
hpgl.plt device-specific file. This file consists of commands which
have been translated into the Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language.
HPGL/2 Default This will generate and translate a temporary patran.hrd file into a
device-specific file called hpgl2.plt. This file consists of
commands which have been translated into the Hewlett-Packard/2
Graphics Language. The HPGL-2 Graphics Language is a new
standard for sending information to HPGL-2 plotters. It uses a new
data compacted feature to shorten transmission time, and new high
level HPGL-2 commands for maximum efficiency. All new plotters
sold by Hewlett-Packard support the HPGL-2 language.
PatranHard to PostScript This will translate a patran.hrd file into a device-specific file
Default called ps.plt. This file consists of commands which have been
translated into the PostScript language. The PostScript driver will
support gray scale or 256 colors, depending on the hardcopy parameter
setup and/or the type of printer to which the device-specific file is sent.
Main Index
756 Patran Reference Manual
Additional Information for Printers/Plotters
Internal Memory If you frequently experience problems with large plot files that hang up
your terminal or cannot be plotted in their entirety, you may need
additional memory. Contact your hardware supplier for more information
on how to determine if more printer/plotter RAM is necessary.
Pen Plotters The order your pens are placed in the carousel can affect your plot output.
Refer to your HPGL or HPGL/2 users guide for more information.
Printer/Plotter Most plotters and some printers have front panels that allow you to control
Hardware Settings the printer/plotter settings. Please refer to your printer/plotter manual for
information on how to modify these settings.
Main Index
Ap. B: Printing Options 757
If Your Plot Does Not Turn Out as Expected
Bad Hardware Verify that the connection between the workstation and the printer/plotter
Connection is valid. This can be done by submitting another plot to be printed/plotted.
Usually the printer/plotter vendor provides a small test program which
can serve as a check.
Wrong Printer/Plotter Ensure that the destination defined in the hardcopy form is valid. By
Destination checking the hardware connection above, you will also be checking the
destination. Submitting a test program is highly recommended to verify
your setup.
Network Problems Sometimes network connections can be blamed for hardcopy plots not
being submitted to the desired printer/plotter. If possible, attempt to
bypass the network when submitting a test plot to eliminate the network
as a possible source of error.
Hardware Memory Usually printers/plotters come with enough RAM for most plots to be
plotted satisfactorily. If you consistently produce very large plots (device-
specific hardcopy file is 1.5 Mb or more) you may need to upgrade the
printer/plotter internal memory. Please consult your printer/plotter
manufacturer for more information.
Hardware Problems Submitting a test plot can also determine if your printer/plotter hardware
is the problem. Sometimes turning the hardware OFF and ON can solve
the problem.
The manual for your printer/plotter may contain additional information to help you diagnose any
problems.
Main Index
758 Patran Reference Manual
Hardware Setup
Laser Printers
Submit Command lp (HP700 platform)
lpr (Solaris/SGI/Digital UNIX/IBMRS6K/Windows NT)
Destination • Multiple destinations are setup in
/etc/printcap and /usr/spool.
• Destinations in Windows NT are setup in the Printer Setup menu.
Example: lpr -Plw2 ps.plt.01
Plotters
Submit Command cat
Destination Name of serial or parallel port on the workstation that is connected to the
plotter.
Example: cat hpgl2.plt.01 > /dev/ttya
Again, keep in mind that your setup could be very different from the above. Your system administrator
should be able to assist Patran users with printer/plotter setups for your computer environment.
Main Index
Ap. B: Printing Options 759
Supported Hardware for Patran Hardcopy
HPGL HP DraftPro
HP DraftPro DXL
HP DraftPro EXL
HP 7475, 7220, 7440, 7470, 7550, 7570, 7580, 7585, 7586, 7595, 7596,
9872
HP 7550 Plus
HP DesignJet
CGM Any device conforming to the CGM protocol.
Main Index
760 Patran Reference Manual
Supported Hardware for Patran Hardcopy
Main Index
Index
Patran Reference Manual
A display
ACIS (sat) files, 158 color configurations, 368
analysis manager, 591 menu, 12
applications properties, 367
IND
mass properties, 762
automatic centering, 335 E
EX
Ease-of-use enhancements
B Hierarchical groups, 292
beam library, 502 element results files, 748
Index beam results files, 749 EPS files, 224
bolt preload, 581 experimental data fitting, 591
boolean lists, 488 exporting models, 61
IGES files, 201
Parasolid (xmt) Transmit files, 197
C Patran 2.5 Neutral files, 192
CATIA files, 111
STEP files, 207
CGM, 226, 755
express neutral files, 96
clipping, 339
clipping perspective, 339
clipping plane, 337 F
color configurations, 368 file commands, 62
command line comments, 22 file formats
coordinate system, 335 IGES file, 741
creating lists, 481 journal file, 739
current viewport, 309 neutral file, 713
session file, 739
file menu, 12
D file types
database
hardcopy file, 46
freeing unused space, 60
IGES file, 46
databases
journal file, 46
closing, 59
PATRAN 2.5 results files, 46
creating, 59
PATRAN 2.5 results template files, 750
opening, 59
PATRAN database, 46
rebuilding
files
, 60 p3epilog.pcl, 54
reverting, 60 p3prolog.pcl, 54
saving, 60 session, 54
design studies, 537, 546 settings.pcl, 47, 54
displacement results files, 744 template database, 56
Main Index
810 Patran Reference Manual
P
p3epilog.pcl file, 54
p3epolog.pcl file, 47
p3prolog.pcl file, 47, 54
page setup, 221
Parasolid (xmt) files, 155, 158
Main Index
INDEX 811
Main Index
812 Patran Reference Manual
W
window center, 337
Z
zoom, 339
Main Index